WEEK: 1
Date of preparing: 22/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: ……………/8/2014.
Period 1 Unit 1: HELLO
Lesson 1(1, 2, 3)
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: Greet and self-
introduce.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners: - Hello/ hi. I’m + name.
- Vocabulary: hello, hi, I, am, nice to meet you.
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Check pupils’ books, note books ……
3. New lesson:
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up
Say hello to the class and introduce yourself, using
Hello. I am + name. Walk around the class to say hello
again to some pupils and ask them to answer.
1. Look, listen and repeat
Ask students to look at the picture in the book and ask:
Who are they in the picture?
Where are they?
Ask students listen and repeat after the tape
Repeat again and read in pairs
2. Point and say
- Teach vocabulary:
Hello Hi
Am = ‘m Nice to meet you.
Checking: What and where
Greeting
Look at the picture and
answer
They are teacher and
students
They are in the class
Note: difference between Hi / Hello.
Hi is very informal. Pupils can use with friends but not
with an adult, e.g a teacher.
Hello is also informal and friendly but more formal than
Hi. It can be used with teachers and other adults.
Setting the sense: - Have pupils look at pictures. Ask
them to identify the characters in the pictures.
Who are in the pictures? What are they doing?
- Sentence Partners: - Hello
- Hi. I’m + name
I’m + name (I’m = I am)
- Call on a pair and ask them to pretend to be Miss Hien
and Nam to act out the greeting exchange. Call on one
more pair to act out Mai and Quan to self- introduce.
Have the class repeat all the phrases in this section and
Teacher correct the Ss pronunciation (stress, assimilation
of sounds and intonation)
- Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of
the class. The rest of the class observe and give
comments if possible.
- Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension
of the language.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to
reinforce their pronunciation
3. Let’s Talk
Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask
them to identify the characters in the pictures.
Ask Ss work in pairs to greet and self- introduce. Call
some pairs to act out
Correct their pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.
- Retell the content of the lesson.
5. Homework
Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new
words and structures.
Listen and repeat after
the teacher
Slap the board
Work in pairs
Work in pairs
Do exercises. Learn by
heart the new words and
structures.
Date of preparing: 22/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching:………………../8/2014.
Period 2: UNIT 1: HELLO
Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: greet and self-
introduce.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils greet and introduce their names.
3. New lesson:
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Say hello to partner.
4. Listen and tick
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 7 of
the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell
pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and
tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the
boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the
partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T
give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of
the listening text.
Answer: 1.b 2.a
5. Let’s write
- Have pupils open their books to Page 7. Get Ss to read
Greeting
Listen and tick
the text. Tell pupils that they are going to read and get
the information to write the missing words in dialogue 1
and 2.
- Pupils read individually silently and complete the
dialogues.
- Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction.
- Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the
class. The rest of the class listen and give comments.
- Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension
of the reading text.
Answer: 1. Hello, I’m 2. I’m, Hello.
6. Let’s sing
- Introduce the Hello Song, Page 7.
- Play the recording and listen the Hello Song
- Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of
the rhythm.
- Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do
the actions. The others clap their hands after the song
- Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the
actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them
when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors.
- Call on one group to perform the song at the front of
the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the
rhythm.
- Have class sing the song again to reinforce their
pronunciation.
4.Consolidation
Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.
- Retell the content of the lesson.
5. Homework
Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new
words and structures.
Work in pairs
Listen and sing
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK: 1
Date of preparing: 24/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: ………………./8/ 2014.
Period 3: UNIT 1: HELLO
Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge:
- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to greet and respond to greeting
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners: How are you? - I’m fine
- Vocabulary: bye, goodbye, Thanks, And you? How
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Ask Ss to greet to each other
3. New lesson:
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chatting
- T asks Ss to repeat the greeting and introducing
oneself.
1. Look, Listen and repeat.
Have Ss to look at the book at page 8.
Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are
saying.
Set the scene: we are going to review phrases saying
hello and bye.
Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines
in the speech bubbles
Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in
the speech bubbles two times.
Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s
part and the other repeat Nam’ part.
Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat
Answer the teacher’s
questions
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Read in pairs
each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their
pronunciation.
Teach vocabulary:
Bye=goodbye How
Thanks= thank you And you
- Sentence Partners: How are you? - I’m fine
2. Point and say
Have Ss look at the pictures on page 8
Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names.
Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
T models/ allocates the parts of characters Mai and
Nam to Ss
Ask them to act out the dialogue1. Repeat the step
with some other pairs for pictures
Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs,
using the pictures.
Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
intonation) when necessary.
Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of
the class. The others observe and give comments.
Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
3 - Let’s talk:
Show picture and give task.
Have Ps work in pair to greet and respond to greeting.
- Display in class, others comment
Listen and correct.
Have Ps do
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Look at 4 pictures
Point to the pictures and
practise
Play role and speak out.
Work in pair practice
talking:
Do exercises in the
workbook
Date of preparing: 24/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: ………………./8/
2014.
Period 4: UNIT 1: HELLO
Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: Greet and respond to
greeting.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils greet and introduce their names.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chatting
- T asks Ss to repeat the greeting and introducing
oneself.
4. Listen and number
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page of
the Student Book. Give the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and match the information they hear to the
pictures. They should number the boxes.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the
answer with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
Answer the teacher’s
questions
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and number
Answer:1.d 2.c 3.b 4.a
5. Read and complete
-T explains the situation and how to do the exercise
-Ask students to read the dialogue 1, 2 in the book and
fill the words given to complete the dialogue.
Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs
in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give
the remark.
Correct the pronunciation.
Answer: 1.Goodbye 2. Bye 3. Fine 4. thank you
6. Let’s write
- Have pupils open their books to Page 9. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the pictures and what they
are saying. Tell pupils that they are going to read and
get the information to write the missing words in
dialogue.
- Pupils read individually silently and complete the
dialogues.
- Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction.
- Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the
class. The rest of the class listen and give comments.
- Make a few questions to check pupils’
comprehension of the reading text.
- Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
Answer: 1. How 2. I’m fine, thanks
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Read in pairs
Write the suitable words
to fill in the blank
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 2
Date of preparing: 31/ 9/ 2014
Date of teaching: ………………/9/ 2014.
Period 5: UNIT 1: HELLO
Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: greet and self-
introduce. Greet and respond to greeting and self-introduction. Pronounce the
sounds in the letters /h/, /b/ correctly
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils greet and introduce their names.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chatting
- T asks Ss to repeat the greeting and responding to
greeting.
1. Listen and repeat
Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant.
Then change the role.
Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in
the words bye and hello
-Introduce the sounds /b/ and /h/
-Have Ps practice the sounds carefully
-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.
-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are
similar to, and then have Ps read words after you
+ Ask some pairs to ask and answer.
+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to
reinforce their pronunciation.
2. Listen and write
- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the
suitable words to fill in the blank.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the
Ask ps to practice in pairs
Listen and repeat
Read 2 sentences
answer with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups
for correction.
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
Answer: 1. Bye 2.hello
3. Let’s chant
- Introduce the Chant Hello
-Turn on the tape.
- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.
- Ps chant in group and individual.
- Ps chant and do the action.
-Teacher reinforce their pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Listen and fill in the blank
Ps listen to the tape and
chant
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 2
Date of preparing: 31/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: …………./9/ 2014.
Period 6: UNIT 1: HELLO
Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: greet and self-
introduce, Greet and respond to greeting, and self-introduction.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils greet and introduce their names.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Read the chant Hello
4. Read and match.
T introduces the topic “you are going to read the
sentences to get the information in order to match the
questions to the answers”.
Ss read the sentences individually and check their
prediction. Ss do the task (match the sentence with a
appropriate picture.)
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
Answers: 1 – d; 2 – a; 3 – b; 4 – c.
5. Read and write
- Have pupils open their books to Page 11. Tell pupils
that they are going to read and get the information to
write the missing words in sentences.
- Pupils read individually silently and complete the
dialogues.
- Pair works. Pupils trade their answers for correction.
- Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the
class. The rest of the class listen and give comments.
- Make a few questions to check pupils’
comprehension of the reading text.
- Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
Answer: 1. Hello 2. I’m 3. Nice
4. How 5. I’m fine/ Fine
6. Project
- Introduce the name card.
Read the chant Hello
Look at the sentences in
the book
Read
Work individually
Work in pairs
Write the suitable words
to fill in the blank
Read 5 sentences
Read and write
Work individually
Work in group
- Explain how to do the exercise: Make name cards
about themselves and others.
-Ss Present them to class. The rest listen to and give
the remark. Correct the pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 2
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 7: UNIT 2: WHAT’S YOUR NAME?
Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer
questions about one’s name.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners: What’s your name? - My name’s Mai
- Vocabulary: what, your, name, my, is=’s, are=’re
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils greet and introduce their names and their health.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Sing hello song
1. Look, listen and repeat.
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on
page 12 and what they are saying.
Sing the song
Look at the pictures in the
book
Set the scene “you are going to listen to Peter and
Nam, Linda and Mai greet and introduce their names.
Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.
T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.
Call on one pair. One repeats Peter’s part, the other
repeats Nam’s part.
Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to
reinforce their pronunciation. And do the same with
the dialogue between Linda and Mai
2. Point and say
- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 12. Elicit the
characters in the pictures and their names.
Teach vocabulary:
What are=’re
Your Name
My is=’s
check vocab: slap the board
Model sentence: What’s your name?-My name’s Mai.
Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the
characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to
point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the
pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer
help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation
of sounds, intonation) when necessary.
- Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front
of the class. The rest of the class observe and give
comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
3 Let’s Talk
Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask
them to identify the characters in the pictures.
Ask Ss work in pairs to ask and answer questions
about one’s name. Call some pairs to act out
Correct their pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
Listen and repeat
Look and find out the
model sentences
Point the pictures and
practise
Pactise in pairs
Do exercises in the
words workbook
Date of preparing: 02/ 9/ 2014
Date of teaching: ……………………./9/ 2014.
Period 8: UNIT 2: WHAT’S YOUR NAME?
Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions
about one’s name.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss writing, reading and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils greet and introduce their names.
3. New lesson:
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up
Ask and answer questions about one’s name
4. Listen and tick
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page of the
Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in
the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that
they are going to listen to the recording and tick the
pictures they hear. Guess the answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the
boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the
partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T
Practise in pairs
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Listen and tick
give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of
the listening text.
Answer: 1.a 2. b
5. Look and write
- Have pupils open their books to Page 13. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the pictures and what they are
saying.
- Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information
to write the missing words in dialogue 1 and 2.
- Ss read silently and complete the dialogues.
- Ss trade their answers within pairs for correction
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The
others listen and give comments.
Answers: 1. My name is / I’m
2. Mai/ my name is/ I’m
- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the reading text.
Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
6. Let’s sing
- Introduce The alphabet song, Page 13.
- Play the recording and listen to The alphabet song
- Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of
the rhythm.
- Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the
actions. The others clap their hands after the song
- Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the
actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them
when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors.
- Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the
class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the
rhythm.
- Have class sing the song again to reinforce their
pronunciation.
4.Consolidation
Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.
- Retell the content of the lesson.
5. Homework
Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Work in pairs
Listen and sing
Do exercises in the
words and structures. workbook
WEEK: 3
Date of preparing: 5/ 9/ 2014
Date of teaching: ……………/9/2014.
Period 9: UNIT 2: WHAT’S YOUR NAME?
Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge:
- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about
how to spell one’s name.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners: How do you spell your name? –L-I-N-D-A
- Vocabulary: How, spell
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Ask Ss to greet to each other
3. New lesson:
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Sing the alphabet song
1. Look, Listen and repeat.
Have Ss to look at the book at page 14.
Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are
saying.
Set the scene: we are going to review phrases
What’s your name? My name’s Mai
Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines
in the speech bubbles
Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in
the speech bubbles two times.
Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s
part and the other repeat Nam’s part.
Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat
each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their
pronunciation.
- Teach vocabulary:
How spell
- Elicits the structures
How are do you spell your name? –L-I-N-D-A
2. Point and say
Have Ss look at the pictures on page 14
Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names.
Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
T models/ allocates the parts of characters Linda and
Nam to Ss
Ask them to act out the dialogue1. Repeat the step
with some other pairs for pictures
Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs,
using the pictures.
Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
intonation) when necessary.
Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of
Sing the song
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Read in pairs
Look at 4 pictures
Point to the pictures and
practise
the class. The others observe and give comments.
Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
3 - Let’s talk:
Show picture and give task.
Have Ps work in pairs to ask and answer questions
about how to spell one’s name.
- Display in class, others comment
Listen and correct.
Have Ps practise
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words and structure
Play role and speak out.
Work in pair practice
talking:
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 3
Date of preparing: 5/ 9/ 2014
Date of teaching:……………/9/ 2014.
Period 10: UNIT 2: WHAT’S YOUR NAME?
Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge:
- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about
how to spell one’s name.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils greet and introduce, spell their names.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chatting
- T asks Ss to make question and answer about how to
spell one’s name.
4. Listen and number
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 15
of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and match the information they hear to the
pictures. They should number the boxes.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the
answer with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
Answer: 1.c 2.b 3.d 4.a
5. Read and match
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on
page 15.
Set the scene: “you are going to read the dialogues
to get the information in order to match the pictures
to the appropriate dialogues.”
Have a revision of the language: “How do you spell
your name?” – “L – I – N – D – A.”
Ask Ss to read the dialogues and do the task (match
the sentence with a appropriate picture.)
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
Answers: 1 – c; 2 – b; 3-a
Practise in pairs
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and number
Ps answer
Look at 3 pictures
Work Individually
Practice the dialogues in
pairs
6. Let’s write
- Have pupils open their books to Page 15. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the pictures and what they
are saying. Tell pupils that they are going to read and
get the information to write the missing words in
dialogue.
- Pupils practice in pairs and complete the dialogues.
- Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction.
- Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the
class. The rest of the class listen and give comments.
- Make a few questions to check pupils’
comprehension of the reading text.
- Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Practise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
Date of preparing: 7/ 9/ 2014
Date of teaching: ………………/9/ 2014.
Period 11: UNIT 2: WHAT’S YOUR NAME?
Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer
questions about one’s name, how to spell one’s name, make and respond to
instructions. Pronounce the sounds in the letters /m/, /p/ correctly.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils greet and introduce their names.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chatting
- T asks Ss to make question and answer about how to
spell one’s name
1. Listen and repeat
Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant.
Then change the role.
Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in
the words Mai and Peter
-Introduce the sounds /m/ and /p/
-Have Ps practice the sounds carefully
-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.
-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are
similar to, and then have Ps read words after you
+ Ask some pairs to ask and answer.
+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to
reinforce their pronunciation.
2. Listen and write
- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the
suitable words to fill in the blank.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the
blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with
the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups
for correction.
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
Answer: 1. Peter 2. Mai
3. Let’s chant
- Introduce the Chant What’s your name?
- Turn on the tape.
- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.
- Ps chant in group and individual.
Ask ps to practice in pairs
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Look at 2 sentences
Listen and fill in the blank
Ps listen to the tape and
chant
- Ps chant and do the action.
- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Do exercises in the
workbook
Date of preparing: 7/ 9/ 2014
Date of teaching: ………………./9/ 2014.
Period 12: UNIT 2: WHAT’S YOUR NAME?
Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer
questions about one’s name, how to spell one’s name.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils greet and introduce, spell their names.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Read the chant: What’s your name?
- T asks Ss to repeat the greeting and responding to
greeting.
4. Read and match.
T introduces the topic “you are going to read the
questions to get the information in order to match the
answers”.
Ask ps to practice in pairs
Look at the sentences in
the book
Ss read the sentences individually and check their
prediction. Ss do the task (match the sentence with a
appropriate picture.)
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
Answers: 1 – b; 2 – d; 3 – a; 4 – c.
5. Read and complete
-T explains the situation and how to do the exercise
-Ask students to read the 2 dialogues in the book and
fill the words given to complete the dialogue.
Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs
in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give
the remark.
Correct the pronunciation.
Answer: 1. my 2. Hi 3. How 4. What’s 5. name’s
6. Project
- Introduce the situation.
- Explain how to do the exercise: Work in groups.
Interview their classmates.
-Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and
give the remark. Correct the pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Read and Work
individually
Work in pairs
Fill the suitable words in
the blanks
Work in groups
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 4
Date of preparing: 19/ 9/ 2014
Date of teaching: ………………/9/2014.
Period 13: UNIT 3: THIS IS TONY.
Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: introduce someone.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners: This is Tony
- Vocabulary: This
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils greet and introduce their names and their health.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Sing the alphabet song
1. Look, listen and repeat.
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on
page 13 and what they are saying.
Set the scene “you are going to listen to T introduce
someone to class, The class greet the newcomer.
Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.
T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.
Call on one pair. One repeats teacher’s part, the other
Sing the alphabet song
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
repeats Ss’ part.
Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to
reinforce their pronunciation. And do the same with
the dialogue between Linda and Mai
2. Point and say
- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 12. Elicit the
characters in the pictures and their names.
Teach vocabulary:
This
Model sentence: This is Tony.
Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
- Model: Call someone to practice in front of the
whole class. Practice in group. Allocate the parts of
the characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to
point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the
pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer
help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation
of sounds, intonation) when necessary.
- Call on some groups to perform their task at the front
of the class. The rest of the class observe and give
comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
3 Let’s Talk
Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask
them to identify the characters in the pictures.
Ask Ss work in groups to introduce someone. Call
some groups to act out
Correct their pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Look and find out the
model sentences
Point the pictures and
practise
Pactise in groups
Do exercises in the
workbook
Date of preparing: 19/ 9/ 2014
Date of teaching: ……………….../9/2014.
Period 14: UNIT 3: THIS IS TONY.
Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: introduce someone.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss writing, reading and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils to ask and answer about the specific information.
3. New lesson:
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up
Ask Ps to introduce someone
4. Listen and tick
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 19 of
the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell
pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and
tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the
boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the
partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T
give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of
the listening text.
Answer: 1.a 2.b
5. Look and write
- Have pupils open their books to Page 19. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the pictures and what they are
saying.
- Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information
S introduce someone
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Listen and tick
Indentify the characters
in each picture
to write the missing words in dialogue 1 and 2.
- Ss read silently and complete the dialogues.
- Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for
correction
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The
others listen and give comments.
Answers: 1. This is / hello, Nam
2.This is/ hello, Phong
- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the reading text.
Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
6. Let’s sing
- Introduce the How are you? song, Page 19.
- Play the recording and listen the How are you? song
- Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of
the rhythm.
- Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the
actions. The others clap their hands after the song
- Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the
actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them
when necessary. Correct Ss’ errors.
- Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the
class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the
rhythm.
- Have class sing the song again to reinforce their
pronunciation.
4.Consolidation
Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.
- Retell the content of the lesson.
5. Homework
Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new
words and structures.
Work in pairs
Listen and sing
Do exercises in the
Workbook
WEEK: 4
Date of preparing: 21/ 9/ 2014
Date of teaching: …………../9/2014.
Period 15: UNIT 3: THIS IS TONY
Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge:
- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer question about
someone.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners: Is that Tony?-Yes, it is/No, it isn’t
- Vocabulary: that, yes, no, is not = isn’t, it
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Ask Ss to make and respond to instruction
3. New lesson:
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Sing the alphabet song
2. Look, Listen and repeat.
Have Ss to look at the book at page 20.
Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are
saying.
Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases
Is that Tony? Yes, it is.
Is that Quan? No, it’s isn’t. It’s Phong
Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines
in the speech bubbles
Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in
the speech bubbles two times.
Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s
part and the other repeat Nam’ part.
Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat
each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their
pronunciation.
Do the same with the dialogue between Tom and
Sing the song
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Read in pairs
Linda
2. Point and say
- Teach vocabulary:
That yes
No is not = isn’t
It
Check vocab: what and where
- Elicits the structures
Is that Tony? - Yes, it is.
Is that Quan? - No, it’s isn’t. It’s Phong
Have Ss look at the pictures on page 21
Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names.
Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
T models/ allocates the parts of characters Mai and
Nam to Ss use structure:
Is that Tony? - Yes, it is.
Is that Quan? - No, it’s isn’t. It’s Phong
Ask them to act out the model dialogue. Repeat the
step with some other pairs for pictures
Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue point and
use the information in picture a, b, c and d to practice
in pairs. Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
intonation) when necessary.
Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of
the class. The others observe and give comments.
Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
3 - Let’s talk:
Show picture and give task.
Have Ps work in pairs to ask and answer questions
about someone.
- Display in class, others comment
Listen and correct.
Have Ps practise
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
Observe 4 pictures
Point to the pictures and
practise
Practice in pairs
Play role and speak out.
Work in pair practice
talking:
Do exercises in the
workbook
words
WEEK 4
Date of preparing: 21/ 9/ 2014
Date of teaching: …………...../9/ 2014.
Period 16: UNIT 3: THIS IS TONY.
Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge:
- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about
someone.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss reading, listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils ask and answer questions about someone.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chatting
- T asks Ss do after T.
4. Listen and number
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page of
the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and match the information they hear to the
pictures. They should number the boxes.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the
answer with the partner.
Practise in pairs
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and number
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
Answer: 1.c 2.b 3.a 4.d
5. Look, read and answer
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures a, b,
c, d on page 21.
Set the scene: “you are going to read the questions
and find out the answer.”
Have a revision of the language:
“Is that Linda?”– “Yes, it is.”
Ask Ss to read the questions and answer (match the
sentence with a appropriate picture.)
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
Answers: a. Is that Linda? – Yes, it is.
b, Is that Peter? – No, it isn’t. It is Tom
c, Is that Phong? – Yes, it is.
d, Is that Linda? – No, it isn’t. It is Tom.
6. Let’s play
- Explain how the game is played: pupils play in
groups of six. Each group has one set of four pieces of
paper. On each of which one of the four words is
written, e.g. this, is, and one of the character’s names
that they have learnt (Linda or Tony or Tom or Mary).
Each group member pick up one piece of paper. Then
the pupils in each group put their pieces of paper
together in order to make a sentence, e.g. This is my
friend Linda.
- Group work. Pupils play the game in groups. Move
around to help with the activity.
- When the time is up, call on two groups to
demonstrate the game at the front of the class. The rest
Ps answer
Look 4 pictures
Work in pairs
Read the questions and
answers in pairs
Practise in groups
of the class observe and give comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the sentences to
reinforce their pronunciation.
Follow up:
- Have pupils brainstorm and spell their names of their
classmates / friends.
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 5
Date of preparing: 26/9/2014
Date of teaching: ……………../10/2014.
Period 17: UNIT 3: THIS IS TONY.
Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer
questions about someone, introduce someone. Pronounce the sounds in the letters
/t/, /j/ correctly .
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils write the new words.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chatting
- T asks Ss to introduce someone
1. Listen and repeat
Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant.
Then change the role.
Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in
the words Tony and yes
-Introduce the sounds /t/ and /j/
-Have Ps practice the sounds carefully
-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.
-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are
similar to, and then have Ps read words after you
+ Ask some pairs to ask and answer.
+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to
reinforce their pronunciation.
Ask ps to practice in pairs
Listen and repeat
2. Listen and write
- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the
suitable words to fill in the blank.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the
blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with
the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups
for correction.
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
Answer: 1. Tony 2. Yes
3. Let’s chant
- Introduce the Chant Is that Nam?
- Turn on the tape.
- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.
- Ps chant in groups and individual.
- Ps chant and do the action.
- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Read 2 sentences
Listen and fill in the
blanks
Ps listen to the tape and
chant
Do exercises in the
workbook
Date of preparing: 28/ 9/2014
Date of teaching: …………….../10/2014.
Period 18: UNIT 3: THIS IS TONY.
Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer
questions about someone, introduce someone.
- Develop Ss reading, writing skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils ask and answer questions about someone, introduce someone:
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Read the chant Is that Nam?
4. Read and complete.
-Ask Ps observe the pictures and identify the people in
pictures in book on page 23
T explains the situation and how to do the exercise
-Ask students to read the 2 dialogues in the book and
fill the words given to complete the dialogue.
Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs
in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give
the remark.
Correct the pronunciation
Answers: 1 – this; 2 – hello; 3 – that; 4 – isn’t.
5. Look, read and write
Ask Ps observe the pictures and identify the people
in pictures in book on page 23
T introduces the topic “you are going to read the
sentences and find the suitable words to fill in the
blanks”.
Ss read the sentences individually and do the exercise.
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
Answer: 1. Mai 2. Nam 3. Phong 4. Linda 5.Peter
6. Project
- Introduce the situation.
Read chant
Observe the pictures.
Read the sentences in the
book
Read and Work
individually
Work in pairs
Fill the suitable words in
the blanks
Work individually
- Explain how to do the exercise: Draw their best
friend. Then introduce them to class
-Ss draw the picture on the board.
- Ps listen and give the comment and correct Ps’ errors
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Work individually
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 5
Date of preparing: 5/ 10/ 2014
Date of teaching: ………………/10/2014.
Period 19: UNIT 4: HOW ARE YOU?
Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer
questions about someone.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners: Who’s that?- It’s Tony
- Vocabulary: who, Mr, Miss, Mrs
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils ask and answer questions about someone, introduce someone.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Sing how are you song
1. Look, listen and repeat.
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on
page 24 and what they are saying.
Sing the song
Look at the pictures in the
book
Set the scene “you are going to listen to hear Mai and
Nam, Linda and Nam ask and answer questions
introduce someone.
Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.
T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.
Call on four Ps. One repeats Mai’s part, the other
repeats Nam’s part.
Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to
reinforce their pronunciation. And do the same with
the dialogue between Linda and Nam
2. Point and say
- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 24. Elicit the
characters in the pictures and their names.
Teach vocabulary:
Who Mr
Miss Mrs
Check vocab: rub out and remember
Model sentence: Who’s that?-It’s Tony.
Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the
characters Quan and Peter to the pupils. Ask them to
point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the
pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer
help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation
of sounds, intonation) when necessary.
- Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front
of the class. The rest of the class observe and give
comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
3 Let’s Talk
Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask
them to identify the characters in the pictures.
Ask Ss work in pairs to ask and answer questions
about someone. Call some pairs to act out
Correct their pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
Listen and repeat
Look and find out the
model sentences
Point the pictures and
practise
Pair work
Pactise in pairs
Do exercises in the
words workbook
Date of preparing: 5/ 10/ 2014
Date of teaching: …………………/10/ 2014.
Period 20: UNIT 4: HOW OLD ARE YOU?
Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer
questions about someone.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils ask and answer questions about someone.
3. New lesson:
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Jumped words
4. Listen and tick
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 25 of
the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell
pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and
tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the
boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the
partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T
give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of
Work in pairs
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Listen and tick
the listening text.
Answer: 1.b 2.a
5. Read and write
- Have pupils open their books to Page 25. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the pictures and what they are
saying.
- Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information
to write the missing words in dialogue 1 and 2.
- Ss read silently and complete the dialogues.
- Ss trade their answers within pairs for correction
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The
others listen and give comments.
Answers: 1. Who 2.Who’s that?
- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the reading text.
Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
6. Let’s write
- Have pupils open their books to Page 25. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the pictures. Tell pupils that they
are going to read the question and give the answer using
the information in each picture.
- Pupils practice in pairs and complete the answer.
- Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction.
- Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class.
The rest of the class listen and give comments.
- Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of
the reading text.
- Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation
Answer: 1. It’s Tony 2. It’s Mary
3. It’s Peter 4. It’s Linda
4.Consolidation
Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.
- Retell the content of the lesson.
5. Homework
Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new
words and structures.
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Work in pairs
Work individually
Pair work
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK: 6
Date of preparing: 10/ 10 / 2014
Date of teaching: …………………./10/ 2014.
Period 21: UNIT 4: HOW OLD ARE YOU?
Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge:
- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer question about
someone’s age.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners: How old are you?- I’m eight years old.
- Vocabulary: one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten, How old, years
old
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Ask Ss to ask and answer questions about someone.
3. New lesson:
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Sing the alphabet song
1. Look, Listen and repeat.
Have Ss to look at the book at page 26.
Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are
saying.
Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases
Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines
in the speech bubbles
Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in
the speech bubbles two times.
Divide the class into three groups. One repeat Mai’s
part and the others repeat Nam’s part and teacher’s
part.
Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat
each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their
pronunciation.
2. Point and say
Have Ss look at the pictures on page 26
- Teach vocabulary:
How old five
Year(s) old six
One seven
Two eight
Three nine
Four ten
- Elicit the structures
How old are you? - I’m eight years old.
Sing the song
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Read in pairs
Look at 4 pictures
Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names.
Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
T models/ allocates the parts of characters Miss Hien
and Tom to Ss
Ask them to act out the dialogue1. Repeat the step
with some other pairs for pictures
Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs,
using the pictures.
Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
intonation) when necessary.
Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of
the class. The others observe and give comments.
Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
3 - Let’s talk:
Show picture and give task.
Have Ps work in pairs to ask and answer questions
about someone’s age.
- Display in class, others comment
Listen and correct.
Have Ps practise
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Point to the pictures and
practise
Play role and speak out.
Work in pair practice
talking:
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 6
Date of preparing: 10/ 10 / 2014
Date of teaching: …………………./10/ 2014.
Period 22: UNIT 4: HOW OLD ARE YOU?
Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge:
- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer question about
someone’s age.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils count from 1 to 10.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chatting
- T asks Ss to ask and answer questions about
someone
4. Listen and write
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page of
the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and fill the missing information they hear in
the blanks. Before listening Ps can guess the answer.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the
missing words. Check their guess. Compare the
answer with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
Answer: 1.six 2.seven 3.eight 4.ten
5. Read and tick
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on
Practise in pairs
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and fill the missing
words
Ps answer
Look at 4 pictures
page 27.
Set the scene: “you are going to read the dialogues
to get the information in order to tick the right
picture”
Ask Ss to read the dialogues and do the task (match
the sentence with a appropriate picture.)
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to
reinforce their pronunciation
Answers: 1 – 6; 2 – 8; 3-10; 4-10
6. Let’s sing
- Introduce The Let’s count from one to ten song, Page
27.
- Play the recording and listen to The song
- Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line
of the rhythm.
- Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do
the actions. The others clap their hands after the song
- Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the
actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them
when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors.
- Call on one group to perform the song at the front of
the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap
the rhythm.
- Have class sing the song again to reinforce their
pronunciation.
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Work Individually
Read the dialogues in
pairs
Practise in pairs
Sing the song
Do exercises in the
workbook
Date of preparing: 12/ 10/ 2014
Date of teaching: ……………../10/ 2014.
Period 23: UNIT 4: HOW OLD ARE YOU?
Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer
question about someone and someone’s age. Pronounce the sounds in the letters /f/,
/s/ correctly.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils count from one to ten.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chatting
- T asks Ss to ask and answer question about someone
and someone’s age.
1. Listen and repeat
Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant.
Then change the role.
Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in
the words five and six
-Introduce the sounds /f/ and /s/
-Have Ps practice the sounds carefully
-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.
-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are
similar to, and then have Ps read words after you
Ask ps to practice in pairs
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
+ Ask some pairs to ask and answer.
+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to
reinforce their pronunciation.
2. Listen and write
- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the
suitable words to fill in the blank.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the
blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with
the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups
for correction.
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
Answer: 1. five 2. Six
3. Let’s chant
- Introduce the Chant How are you?.
- Turn on the tape.
- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.
- Ps chant in group and individual.
- Ps chant and do the action.
- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Look at 2 sentences
Listen and fill in the blank
Ps listen to the tape and
chant
Do exercises in the
workbook
Date of preparing: 12/ 10/ 2014
Date of teaching: …………………/10/ 2014.
Period 24: UNIT 4: HOW OLD ARE YOU?
Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer
question about someone and someone’s age.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils ask and answer question about someone and someone’s age.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up:
- T asks Ss to read chant How are you?
4. Read and match.
T introduces the topic “you are going to read the
questions to get the information in order to match the
answers”.
Teach vocabulary: Friend
Ss read the sentences individually and check their
prediction. Ss do the task (match the sentence with a
appropriate picture.)
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to
reinforce their pronunciation
Answers: 1 – c; 2 – a; 3 – b.
5.Read and write
- Ask Ps to observe and identify the characters in
pictures.
-T explains the situation and how to do the exercise.
-Ask students to read the 2 dialogues in the book and
fill the words given to complete the dialogue.
Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs
Read the chant
Look at the sentences in
the book
Read and Work
individually
Work in pairs
Observe and identify the
characters
Read then Fill the suitable
words in the blanks
in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give
the remark.
Correct the pronunciation.
Answer: 1. How old/I’m 3. How old/I’m/years old
6. Project
- Introduce the situation.
- Explain how to do the exercise: Talk to your friends.
Write their names and ages
-Ss act out in front of the class. The others listen to
and give the comment, correct the mistakes
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Work in group
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 7
Date of preparing: 17/10/ 2014
Date of teaching: ……………../10/ 2014.
Period 25: UNIT 5: ARE THEY YOUR FRIENDS?
Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: introduce one’s friend
and respond to the introduction.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners: this is my friend Mary.
- Vocabulary: friend
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils ask and answer question about someone and someone’s age.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Sing Let’s count from one to ten song Sing the song
1. Look, listen and repeat.
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on
page 30 and what they are saying.
Set the scene “you are going to listen to Mai, Linda
and Mary greet and introduce one’s friend and
respond to the introduction.
Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.
T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.
Call on one pair. One repeats Peter’s part, the other
repeats Nam’s part.
Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to
reinforce their pronunciation. And do the same with
the dialogue between Linda and Mai
2. Point and say
- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 30. Elicit the
characters in the pictures and their names.
Teach vocabulary:
Friend
Model sentence: Mai, this is my friend, Mary.
– Hello, Mary. Nice to meet you.
Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the
characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to
point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the
pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer
help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation
of sounds, intonation) when necessary.
- Call on some pairs to perform their task at the fron of
the class. The rest of the class observe and give
comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
3 Let’s Talk
Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask
them to identify the characters in the pictures.
Ask Ss work in pairs to introduce one’s friend and
respond to the introduction. Call some pairs to act out
Correct their pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Look and find out the
model sentences
Point the pictures and
practise
Pactise in pairs
Do exercises in the
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
workbook
Date of preparing: 17/10/ 2014
Date of teaching: ………………/10/ 2014.
Period 26: UNIT 5: ARE THEY YOUR FRIENDS?
Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to introduce one’s friend
and respond to introduction.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss writing, reading and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils introduce one’s friend and respond to instructions
3. New lesson:
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up : play game bingo
4. Listen and tick
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 31 of
the Student Book. Give the identification of the characters
in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that
they are going to listen to the recording and tick the
pictures they hear. Guess the answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the
boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the
partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T
Play game
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Listen and tick
give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of
the listening text.
Answer: 1.b 2.a
5. Read and write
- Have pupils open their books to Page 31. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the pictures and what they are
saying.
- Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information
to write the missing words in dialogue 1 and 2.
- Ss read silently and complete the dialogues.
- Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for
correction
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The
others listen and give comments.
Answers: 1. This is / Hello
2. my friend/ Hello
- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the reading text.
Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
6. Let’s sing
- Introduce The more we are together, Page 31.
- Play the recording and listen The more we are together
song
- Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of
the rhythm.
- Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the
actions. The others clap their hands after the song
- Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the
actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them
when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors.
- Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the
class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the
rhythm.
- Have class sing the song again to reinforce their
pronunciation.
4.Consolidation
Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.
- Retell the content of the lesson.
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Work in pairs
Listen and sing
5. Homework
Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new
words and structures.
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK: 7
Date of preparing: 19/10/2014
Date of teaching: …………………/10/2014.
Period 27: UNIT 5: ARE THEY YOUR FRIENDS?
Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge:
- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about
friends.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners: they, they are=they’re, are not=aren’t
- Vocabulary: Are they your friends? –Yes, they are/No, they aren’t
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Ask Ss to introduce one’s friend and respond to introduction.
3. New lesson:
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Sing the alphabet song
1. Look, Listen and repeat.
Have Ss to look at the book at page 32.
Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are
saying.
Set the scene: we are going to learn phrases
Are they your friends?
–Yes, they are/No, they aren’t
Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines
Sing the song
Look at the pictures in the
book
in the speech bubbles
Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in
the speech bubbles two times.
Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s
part and the other repeat Quan’s part.
Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat
each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their
pronunciation. Do the same with the dialogue in
picture b
2. Point and say
Have Ss look at the pictures on page 32
- Teach vocabulary:
They they are=they’re
are not=aren’t
- Elicits the structures
Are they your friends? –Yes, they are
- No, they aren’t Elicit
the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss
to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
T models/ allocates the parts of characters Linda and
Nam to Ss
Ask them to act out the dialogue1. Repeat the step
with some other pairs for pictures
Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs,
using the pictures.
Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
intonation) when necessary.
Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of
the class. The others observe and give comments.
Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
3 - Let’s talk:
Show picture and give task.
Have Ps work in pair to ask and answer questions
about friends.
- Display in class, others comment
Listen and correct.
Have Ps practise
Listen and repeat
Read in pairs
Look at 4 pictures
Point to the pictures and
practise
Play role and speak out.
Work in pair practice
talking:
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK7
Date of preparing: 19/10/ 2014
Date of teaching: ………………../10/ 2014.
Period 28: UNIT 5: ARE THEY YOUR FRIENDS?
Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge:
- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about
friends.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils ask and answer questions about friends.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Jumped words
4. Listen and number
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page of
the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and match the information they hear to the
Practise in pairs
Look at the pictures in the
book
pictures. They should number the boxes.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the
answer with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
Answer: 1.d 2.a 3.b 4.c
5. Read and complete
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on
page 15.
Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph
and use the suitable words given to fill in the
blanks.”
Have a revision of the language
Ask Ss to read the paragraph and do the task (match
the sentence with a appropriate picture.)
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
Answers: 1 – name; 2 – nine; 3 - and; 4 - friends
6. Write about your friends
- Have pupils open their books to Page 33. Ask them
to read the text. T explains how to do the exercise.
- Ss do the exercise. Call on some Ss to report their
answers. Others listen and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Listen and number
Ps answer
Look at 3 pictures
Work Individually
Read the dialogues in
pairs
Work individually
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK: 8
Date of preparing: 24/10/2014
Date of teaching: ………………….../10/2014.
Period 29: UNIT 5: ARE THEY YOUR FRIENDS?
Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: introduce one’s friend
and respond to the introduction, ask and answer questions about friends. Pronounce
the sounds in the letters a / /, e/ / correctly.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils greet and introduce their names.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chatting
- T asks Ss to make question and answer about how to
spell one’s name
1. Listen and repeat
Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant.
Then change the role.
Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in
the words that and yes
-Introduce the sounds / / and / /
-Have Ps practice the sounds carefully
-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.
-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are
similar to, and then have Ps read words after you
+ Ask some pairs to ask and answer.
Ask ps to practice in pairs
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to
reinforce their pronunciation.
2. Listen and write
- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the
suitable words to fill in the blank.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the
blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with
the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups
for correction.
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
Answer: 1. that 2. yes
3. Let’s chant
- Introduce the Chant Who’s that?
- Turn on the tape.
- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.
- Ps chant in group and individual.
- Ps chant and do the action.
- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Look at 2 sentences
Listen and fill in the blank
Ps listen to the tape and
chant
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 8
Date of preparing: 24/10/ 2014
Date of teaching: ……………../10/ 2014.
Period 28: UNIT 5: ARE THEY YOUR FRIENDS?
Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to will be able to: introduce
one’s friend and respond to the introduction, ask and answer questions about
friends.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils will be able to: introduce one’s friend and respond to the
introduction, ask and answer questions about friends.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Read the chant Who’s that?
4. Read and match.
T introduces the topic “you are going to read the
sentences to get the information in order to match the
pictures to the text”.
- Teach vocab:
- Who?
- Model sentence: Who is that? – It’s Tony.
Who are they? – They’re Peter and Linda.
Ss read the sentences individually and check their
prediction. Ss do the task (match the sentence with a
appropriate picture.)
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
Answers: 1 – c; 2 – d; 3 – b; 4 – a.
5. Circle the correct words
-T explains how to do the exercise
-Ask students to read the sentences in the book and
Read the chant
Look at the sentences in
the book. Find out new
words and model
sentence.
Read and Work
individually
Work in pairs
Choose the best answer to
fill in the blanks
choose the best words given to complete the sentences
- do the exercise then report in front of the whole
class. The rest listen to and give the remark.
Correct the pronunciation.
Answer: 1. friend 2. they 3. Peter and Mary
4. Yes 5. Aren’t
6. Project
- Introduce the situation.
- Explain how to do the exercise: present some friends
to class
-Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and
give the remark. Correct the pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Work individually
Do exercises in the
workbook
Date of preparing: 26/10/2014
Date of teaching: …………………/10/2014
Period 31: REVIEW 1
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:
- Perform their abilities in listening, speaking and writing related to the topics from
units 1-5, using the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns they have learnt.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss speaking, listening and writing skills.
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners: Revisions.
- Vocabulary: Revisions.
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
-Ask Ss to write the new words and do exercises in workbook
3. New lesson:
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: - Review the model sentences from unit1
to unit 5
1. Listen and tick
- Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 on page
36 of the Student Book. Give the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the
answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick
the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer
with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
Answers: 1 – b; 2 – a; 3 – a; 4 – b; 5- b
2. Listen and number
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page of
the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and match the information they hear to the
pictures. They should number the boxes. Guess the
answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the
answer with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
Answer: 1.c 2.b 3.d 4.a
3. Read and complete
-T explains the situation and how to do the exercise
-Ask students to read the dialogue in the book and fill
the words given to complete the dialogue. Work in
pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front
Ask ps to practice in pairs
Give the identification
Listen and tick
Work individually
Listen and tick
Work individually
of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the
remark.
Correct the pronunciation.
Answer: 1. Hello 2. name 3. friends 4. nine
4. Read and match
- Whole class. Have pupils turn their books to page 37.
Tell pupils that they are going to read the sentences to
get the information in order to match the sentences to
the sentences.
- Pupils read the sentences individually and do the
task. Monitor the activity and offer help when
necessary.
- Pair works. Have pupils trade their answers for
correction.
- Call on some pupils to report their answers. The rest
of the class listen give comments.
- Make a few questions to check pupils’
comprehension of the sentences.
- Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to
reinforce their pronunciation.
Answer: 1.e 2. d 3. b 4.a 5. c
5. Look and say
Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on Page 37.
Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names.
Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the
characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to act
out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books.
Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
intonation) when necessary.
- Call on some pairs to perform their task in front of
the class. The rest of the class observe and give
comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
Work in pairs
Pair works
Do exercises in the
words workbook
Date of preparing: 26/10/2014
Date of teaching: ……………………../10/2014
Period 32: SHORT STORY
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:
- Review the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns from units 1 - 5.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss speaking, listening and reading skills.
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners: Revisions.
- Vocabulary: Revisions.
- Phonic: Revisions
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
-Ps ask Ps some questions
3. New lesson:
Warm up: - Review the model sentences from unit1
to unit 5
1. Read and Listen to the story
This is the first of the four cartoons about Miu and Cat
and Chit and Mouse. To help Ps get the idea of the
story, simply let them read and listen to this episodes,
the initial task will be more challenging.
2. Complete the conversation
-Ask students to read the story in the book and fill the
suitable words to complete the dialogue. Work in pairs
to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front of the
whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark.
Correct the pronunciation.
- Make a few questions to check pupils’
Ask ps to practice in pairs
Give the identification
Listen and answer T’s
questions
comprehension of the story
Answer: 1. I’m 2. Are you 3. fine 4. Your
5. I’m 6. Meet 7. Do you spell
3. Work in pairs. Have a similar conversation with
a partner. Use the names.
Have Ps work in pair. Use the guide in part2 but use
the real information about themselves
- Display in class, others comment
Listen and correct.
Have Ps practise
4. Match the questions with the answers
- Whole class. Have pupils turn their books to page 38.
Tell pupils that they are going to read the story to get
the information in order to match the questions to the
answers.
- Pupils read the sentences individually and do the
task. Monitor the activity and offer help when
necessary.
- Pair works. Have pupils trade their answers for
correction.
- Call on some pupils to report their answers. The rest
of the class listen give comments.
- Make a few questions to check pupils’
comprehension of the sentences.
- Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to
reinforce their pronunciation.
Answer: 1. c 2. a 3. d 4. b
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, review the phonics,
vocabulary and sentence patterns from units 1 - 5.
Work in pairs
Work in pairs
Work individually
Work in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 9
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 35: UNIT 6: STAND UP!
Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: give and respond to
instructions.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners: be quiet, don’t talk, come here, open your book, close your
book, sit down, stand up
- Vocabulary: be quiet, boy, sir, sorry, please, class
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils do the exercises.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Sing hello song
1. Look, listen and repeat.
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on
page 40 and what they are saying.
Set the scene “you are going to listen to Mr loc and Ss
give and respond to instructions.
Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.
T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.
Call on one pair. One repeats Mr Loc’s part, the other
repeats Ss’ part.
Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to
Sing the song
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
reinforce their pronunciation. And do the same with
the dialogue between Linda and Mai
2. Point, say and do actions
- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 40. Elicit the
characters in the pictures and their names.
Teach vocabulary:
Boy
Sir
Sorry
Please
class
check vocab: slap the board
Model sentence: be quiet = don’t talk
come here
open your book
close your book
sit down
stand up
Ask T requests and Ss do.
- Model: Call some Ss request and the others do.
Allocate the parts of the characters T and Ss do to the
pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the
dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor
the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation
errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when
necessary.
- Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front
of the class. The rest of the class observe and give
comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
3 Let’s Talk
Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask
them to identify the characters in the pictures.
Ask Ss work in pairs. Call some pairs to act out
Correct their pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
Look and find out the
model sentences
Point the pictures and
practise
Pactise in pairs
Do exercises in the
words workbook
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 36: UNIT 6: STAND UP!
Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to make and respond to
instructions.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils write the new words.
3. New lesson:
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up Play game: Simon says
4. Listen and tick
- Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page 41 of the
Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in
the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that
they are going to listen to the recording and tick the
pictures they hear. Guess the answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the
boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the
partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T
give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of
Play game
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Listen and tick
the listening text.
5. Look and write
- Have pupils open their books to Page 41. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the pictures and what they are
saying.
- Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information
to write the missing words in dialogue sentences.
- Ss read silently and complete the dialogues.
- Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for
correction
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The
others listen and give comments.
Answers: 1. Open 2. Quiet 3. Close 4. Sit 5. Come
5. Stand
- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the reading text.
Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
4.Consolidation
Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.
- Retell the content of the lesson.
5. Homework
Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new
words and structures.
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Work in pairs
Listen and sing
Do exercises in the
Workbook
WEEK: 10
Date of preparing: 24/ 8/ 2012
Date of teaching: Monday, August 27th
2012.
Period 37: UNIT 6: STAND UP!
Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge:
- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to Ask for and give permission
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners: May I come in, Mr Loc? – Yes, you can
May I go out, Mr Loc? – No you can’t
- Vocabulary: speak, write, May I…, can, can’t
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Ask Ss to make and respond to instructions.
3. New lesson:
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Play game: Simon says
1. Look, listen and repeat
- Whole class. Have pupils look at their books (Page
42).
Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are
saying.
Set the scene: we are going to learn phrases
May I come in, Mr Loc? – Yes, you can
May I go out, Mr Loc? – No you can’t
Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines
in the speech bubbles
Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in
the speech bubbles two times.
Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s
part and the other repeat Nam’ part.
Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat
each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their
pronunciation.
- Teach vocabulary:
Speak
Write
May I…
Can
can’t = can not
- Elicits the structures
May I come in, Mr Loc? – Yes, you can
Sing the song
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Read in pairs
Look at 4 pictures
May I go out, Mr Loc? – No you can’t
2. Point and say
Have Ss look at the pictures on page 42
Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names.
Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
T models/ allocates the parts of characters Linda and
Nam to Ss
Ask them to act out the dialogue1. Repeat the step
with some other pairs for pictures
Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs,
using the pictures a, b, c, d.
Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
intonation) when necessary.
Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of
the class. The others observe and give comments.
Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
3 - Let’s talk:
Show picture and give task.
Have Ps work in pair.
- Display in class, others comment
Listen and correct.
Have Ps practice. The rest listen to and give comment.
Correct Ss’ error pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Point to the pictures and
practise
Play role and speak out.
Work in pair practice
talking:
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 10
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 38: UNIT 6: STAND UP!
Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge:
- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to Ask for and give permission
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils Ask for and give permission.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Order the words
4. Listen and number
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page of
the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and match the information they hear to the
pictures. They should number the boxes.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the
answer with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
5.Read and match
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on
page 43.
Set the scene: “you are going to read the dialogues
to get the information in order to match the pictures
to the appropriate dialogues.”
Work individually
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and number
Ps answer
Look at 3 pictures
Have a revision of the language:
Ask Ss to read the dialogues and do the task (match
the sentence with a appropriate picture.)
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
Answers: 1 – c; 2 – d; 3-a, 4-b
6. Let’s write
- Have pupils open their books to Page 43. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the pictures and what they
are saying. Tell pupils that they are going to read and
get the information to write the missing words in
dialogue.
- Pupils practice in pairs and complete the dialogues.
- Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction.
- Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the
class. The rest of the class listen and give comments.
- Make a few questions to check pupils’
comprehension of the reading text.
- Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
Answer: 1. Come in 2. Sit down 3 close my book
4. open my book
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Work Individually
Read the dialogues in
pairs
Practise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 39: UNIT 6: STAND UP!
Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: give and respond to
instructions, ask for and give permission. Pronounce the sounds in the letters /k/,
/d/ correctly.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils ask for and give permission.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: jumped words
1. Listen and repeat
Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant.
Then change the role.
Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in
the words come and down
-Introduce the sounds /k/ and /d/
-Have Ps practice the sounds carefully
-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.
-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are
similar to, and then have Ps read words after you
+ Ask some pairs to ask and answer.
+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to
reinforce their pronunciation.
2. Listen and write
- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the
suitable words to fill in the blank.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the
blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with
the partner.
Work individually
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Look at 2 sentences
Listen and fill in the blank
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups
for correction.
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
Answer:
6. Let’s sing
- Put the large piece of paper with the Come and sit
down, Page 44, written on it on the board. Tell pupils
that they are going to sing the Song.
- Play the recording all the way through for pupils to
listen while they are reading the song.
- Play the recording again for pupils to read each line
of the rhythm. Have pupils point to the corresponding
words while they are repeating.
- Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do
the actions. Repeat
the step, but this time have pupils swap their parts.
- Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the
actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them
when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors.
- Call on one group to perform the song at the front of
the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap
the rhythm.
- Have class sing the song again to reinforce their
pronunciation.
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Ps listen to the tape and
chant
Do exercises in the
workbook
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 40: UNIT 6: STAND UP!
Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: give and respond to
instructions, ask for and give permission.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils give and respond to instructions, ask for and give permission.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Sing the Come in and sit down song
4. Read and match.
T introduces the topic “you are going to read the
sentences to get the information in order to match the
pictures to the text”.
Ss read the sentences individually and check their
prediction. Ss do the task (match the sentence with a
appropriate picture.)
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
Answers: 1 – c; 2 – e; 3 – b; 4 – d, 5- a.
6. Read and complete
-T explains the situation and how to do the exercise
-Ask students to look the pictures and name the
Sing the song
Look at the sentences in
the book
Read and Work
individually
Work in pairs
characters in each picture, find out the situation read
the sentences in the book and fill the suitable words to
complete the sentences.
Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs
in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give
the remark.
Correct the pronunciation.
Answer: 1. sit 2. talk 3. Go out/ you can
4. go out/ you can’t
6. Project
- Introduce the situation.
- Explain how to do the exercise: write and put the
instructions in the box. Choose and ask them out
-Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and
give the remark. Correct the pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Fill the suitable words in
the blanks
Practice
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 11
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 41: UNIT 7: THAT’S MY SCHOOL
Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: talk about school
facilities
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners: That’s my school. Is it big?-Yes, it is/No, it isn’t. It’s small.
- Vocabulary: school, big, small, gym, library, computer room, playground
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils ask for and give permission, give and respond to instructions.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Sing Come on and sit down song
1. Look, listen and repeat.
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on
page 46 and what they are saying.
Set the scene “you are going to listen to Linda and
Mai talk about school facilities.
Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.
T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.
Call on one pair. One repeats Mai’s part, the other
repeats Linda’s part.
Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to
reinforce their pronunciation.
2. Point and say
- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 46. Elicit the
characters in the pictures and their names.
Teach vocabulary:
School
Big
Small
Gym
Library
computer room
playground
check vocab: slap the board
Model sentence: That’s my school.
Is it big?-Yes, it is/No, it isn’t. It’s small.
Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
- Model: Call some Ss to talk about school facilities.
Ask them to point the pictures and make sentences.
Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity
and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress,
assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary.
- Call on some Ss to perform their task at the front of
the class. The rest of the class observe and give
comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
Sing the song
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Look and find out the
model sentences
Point the pictures and
practise
to reinforce their pronunciation.
3 Let’s Talk
Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask
them to identify the characters in the pictures.
Ask Ss work in pairs. Call some pairs to act out
Correct their pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Pactise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
Date of planing : 25.10.2014
Date of teaching: 27.10.2014
Week 11
UNIT 7: THAT’S my school
Lesson 1
I.Objectives:
- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to talk about school
facilities
- Develop writing, speaking and listening skill.
II.Teaching methods:
- Communicative method.
- Techniques: + Work in pairs
+ Work in groups, discuss. Ask and answer.
III. Teaching aids:
- Teacher’s aids: Tape cassette, pictures, poster, word cards.
- Students’ aids: book, notebook, workbook.
IV. Languages focus:
 Vocabulary: classroom, gym, library, computer room, playground.
Sentence patterns: That is my school.
Is it big?/ small? - Yes, it is/ No, it isn’t.
V. Procedures:
Time Steps/Activities Work
arrangement
1’
3’
5’
5’
5’
A.Class organization. Greeting
B. New lesson.
Warm up: slap the board
Pre-teach vocabulary
Classroom (n) Gym (n)
Library (n) computer room (n)
playground(n)
* check vocabulary: Match words with
pictures
1.Look, listen and repeat.
- Have Ss to look at the book at page 46
and identify the question:
Who are they?. What are they
talking about?
-You are going to listen the dialogue
- Play the recording all the way through
- Play the recording again two times.
- Divide the class into groups.
- Some pairs to come to the front to read
the dialogue
- Play the recording again.
Model sentence:
+That is my school.
That is my classroom.
+ Is it big? No, it isn’t
Is it small? Yes, it is
Practice
2.Look and say.
- Have Ss look at the pictures a, b, c and
d on page 46
- T models the dialogue
T give picture a & say : That’s the gym.
Others say the same.
- T- wc
- T - Wc
- T – WC. Read new words
- Ss to listen as they read the
dialogue.
- Whole class to repeat each
line
- Ss read in pairs the dialogue
- whole class to repeat each
line in the text a few times
- Ss look at the pictures a, b, c
and d on page 46
- Ss repeat
- Ss to work in pairs to practice
- The others listen & give the
coment
Go out Come in Sit down
Be quiet
Stand upDon’t talk
Date of planing : 25.10.2014
Date of teaching: 28.10.2014
Week 11
UNIT 7: THAT’S my school
Lesson 2
I.Objectives:
5’
5’
4’
2’
- Some Ss volumteer come to the class
3. Talk
- Ask Ss open their book P.46 and look
at the pictures.
- Some Ss volumteer come to the class,
the other listen and give the comment.
4. Listen and tick
- Have Ss look at Pictures 1a, b; 2a, b ;
3a,b on Page 47
- 1st
:Play the recording all the way
through
- 2nd
: play the recording for Ss to listen
and tick the correct pictures.
- 3rd
: play the recording for Ss to check
their answers.
- Ask some questions to ensure Ss’
comprehension of the listening text.
5. Read and write
Have Ss look at Pictures a, b and guess
what he says.
- Monitor the activity and offer help
when necessary / correct typical
pronunciation errors.
- Call on a pair to demonstrate at the
front of the class.
- Have the whole class repeat all the
phrases to reinforce their pronunciation
Sing: This is the way we go to school
C. Homework
Practice more about the dialogue and
learn them by heart
Prepare lesson 2
- Ss to look at the Picture
a,b,c,d and answer the
question: What is this?
- Ss to introduce with: That’s
my……
- Identify the characters and
guess what they are saying.
- Ss to listen while and they are
looking the pictures.
- Ss to listen and tick the
correct pictures.
- Ss to check their answers.
- Ss trade their answers in pairs
for correction
- Ss to work in pairs to do the
exercise.
Answer:
That is my classroom
That is the library
That is the computer room
That is the gym
Write all into their notebooks
- Understand how to ask and answer questions about school facilities
- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer the
quetion about school facilities.
- Develop speaking and listening skill.
II.Teaching methods:
- Communicative method.
- Techniques: + Work in pairs
+ Work in groups, discuss. Ask and answer.
III. Teaching aids:
- Teacher’s aids: Tape cassette, pictures, poster, word cards.
- Students’ aids: book, notebook, workbook.
IV. Languages focus:
 Vocabulary: gym, computer room, playground, old, new, large
Sentence patterns: Is it big?/ small? - Yes, it is/ No, it isn’t.
V. Procedures:
Time Steps/Activities Work
arrangement
1’
3’
7’
4’
7’
A.Class organization. Greeting
B. New lesson.
Warm up: Reorder the letter
Ygm ………. Csohol………….
Lpyagournd………….
Labriyr………
Who is faster who is a winner
a. Pre-teach vocabulary
Beautiful new old large
Big small Look at
* check vocabulary: R. O. R
b. present the dialogue
*set the scene: Giving introduction of
the text :
Set the scene: “we are going to learn
how to ask about school facilities.”
- Play the recording and asks Ss to listen
to the tape twice.
Is your school big? Yes, it is
Is your classroom big? No, it isn’t. It’s
small.
Listen and repeat
- T- wc
- T - Wc
- T – WC. Read new words
- Ss to look at the book at page
48; identify the characters in
the picture and what they are
speaking.
- Ss to listen as they read the
dialogue.
7’
4’
2’
- T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus
three times.
- Divide the class into two groups.
- Let Ss practice the dialogue in pairs
- Play the recording again for the whole
class to repeat each line in the speech
bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation .
* Presenting new structure:
- T gives a situation to present (using
picture)
- T elicits the structures by asking Ss to
speak out the model sentence:
c.Practice: Point and say
Have Ss look at the pictures and
introduce four characters:
T models the dialogue (use a picture)
a. school,new/ yes b. gym,big/ yes
c. library, old/no d.playground,large/ no
- Have Ss to work in pairs
- Monitor the activity and offer help
when necessary.
- Call on some pairs to perform the task
at the front of the class.
- Make some questions to check Ss’
comprehension of language
d. Production:
Let’s talk
- Have Ss look at the pictures on page
48 and identify the characters in the
pictures.
T gives some cues:
a. classroom/ ( small)/ big b. library/ big
c. gym/ (large)/ small
d. computer room/new
- Monitor the activity, correct typical
pronunciation errors.
- Call on a pair to demonstrate at the
front of the class.
C. Homework:
Learn all vocabulary, practice more
- Whole class to repeat each
line
- Ss read in group, pair the
dialogue
Some pairs to read it aloud
- whole class to repeat each
line in the text a few times
Is the …. + adj?
Yes,it is/ No, it isn’t
- Ss look at the pictures a, b, c
and d on page 48
- Ss to repeat the sentences in
the bubbles a few times
- The class repeat all the
phrases
- Ss work in pairs to practice
- The others listen & give the
coment
- whole class repeat all the
phrases to reinforce their
pronunciation.
- Ss to look at the Picture
a,b,c,d and answer the
question: What is this?
- Ss talk with: Is the……
- Ss to work in pairs (use the
words on the board).
- Ss trade their answers in pairs
for correction
- 6 – 7 pairs. The others listen
& give the coment
Date of planing : 30.10.2014
Date of teaching: 3.11.2014
Week 12
UNIT 7: THAT’S my school
Lesson 3
I.Objectives:
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to pronunciate the sound g, l
- Review how to ask and answer about school facilities.
- Develop speaking, writing skills.
II.Teaching methods:
- Communicative method.
- Techniques: + Work in pairs
+ Work in groups, discuss. Ask and answer.
III. Teaching aids:
- Teacher’s aids: Tape cassette, pictures, poster, word cards.
- Students’ aids: book, notebook, workbook.
IV. Languages focus:
 Vocabulary: gym, computer room, playground, old, new, large
Sentence patterns: Is it big?/ small? - Yes, it is/ No, it isn’t.
Phonics: gym, look.
V. Procedures:
Time Steps/Activities Work
arrangement
1’
10’
A.Class organization. Greeting
B. New lesson.
1. Warm up: Read and Match
- T introduces the topic “you are going to
read the sentences to get the information
in order to match with the respond ”.
- Monitor the activity and offer help when
necessary
1. Is that your school?
2. Is the library big?
- T- wc
- T – Wc
- Ss read the sentences
individually and check their
prediction
- Ss do the task (match the
sentence with a appropriate
respond
a. No,it isn’t. It’s old.
Do exercises in the workbook
7’
5’
10’
2’
3. Is the music room new?
4. This is my school
2. Listen and repeat
- Have Ss open the book page 50, look at
the words gym/look and notice the letter
coloured differently in both words.
- Produce the sound of the letter g in the
word gym and l in the word look
3. Listen and write
- Ask Ss to say what they think about
when they hear the sound
- Play the recording all the way through
for Ss to listen
Answer: The school gym is large
Look at the library
4. Let’s chant
- Play the recording all the way through
for Ss to listen while they are reading the
chant in their books
- Have Ss listen and repeat ( 3 times).
- Monitor the activity and offer help when
necessary/ correct typical pronunciation
errors.
- Call on a group to recite the chant. The
others clap their hands
- Make a few questions to check Ss’
comprehension of language
C. Home- link:
- Practice more the structure
- Do the exercises. Prepare unit 8
b. Wow! It’s very nice
c. No, it isn’t. It is small
d. Yes, it is
- whole class read each
sentence in chorus
- Ss listen and repeat :
The gym is old
Look at the school
- Ss write the words they
hear
- Compare with their
parners
- Ss to listen while they are
reading the chant in their
books
- Whole class to repeat each
line
- Ss read in group, pair
- whole class to repeat each
line in the text a few times
Date of planing : 30.10.2014
Date of teaching: 4.11.2014
Week 12
UNIT 8: THIS IS MY PEN
Lesson 1
I. Objectives:
- To identify school things.
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to identify school things
- Develop speaking, reading skills.
II. Teaching method:
- Communicative method.
- Techniques: + Ask and answer
+ Work in pairs and individually. Work in groups, discuss.
III. Teaching aids:
- Teacher’s aids: audio, stickers, puppets, flashcards.
- Students’ aids: book, notebook, workbook.
IV. Languages focus:
a. Vocabulary: pen, rubber, ruler, pencil case, school bag, pencil sharpener,
notebook, crayon, coloured pencil, correction pen, ballpoint pen….
b.Sentence patterns: This is my pen. That is my….
V. Procedures:
Time Steps/Activities Work
arrangement
1’
3’
10’
7’
5’
A.Class organization. Greeting
B. New lesson.
1. Warm up: put the words in order
1. school/ this/ my/ is
2. is/ new/ computer room/ the?
C .New lesson.
a.vocabulary
pen rubber ruler crayon
pencil case school bag notebook
pencil sharpener coloured pencil
correction pen ballpoint pen….
* check vocab: real objects / pictures
b. set the scene
- Set the scene “you are going to listen
to Linda and robot talk about school
things.
1. Look, listen and repeat.
- Play the recording and asks Ss to listen
to the tape twice.
- Have whole class repeat all the phrases a
few times to reinforce their pronunciation.
- T elicits model sentences from students
Giới thiệu đồ dùng học tập của mình:
This/ That is my + tên đồ dùng học tập
2. Look and say
- T- wc
- T – Wc
3. that/a / gym/ is
4. the library/ large/ is?
- T – WC. Read new words
- Ss to identify the
characters in the picture on
page 52 and what they are
saying.
- whole class read each
sentence in chorus
- Ss listen and repeat :
This is my pen
That’s my rubber
8’
2’
- Ask them to identify the characters in the
pictures and what they should say.
Fill the bubbles and have Ss to repeat the
lines a few times
- Ask Ss to practice introducing their
school things, using pictures
a. pencil b. pencil case c. school bag
d. notebook e. pencil sharpener
- Call on some pairs to perform the task
at the front of the class.
3. Talk
- Fill in the speech bubbles with the
correct phrases promted by Ss
S1: This is my rubber S2: Is it?
S1: Yes, it is
- Have Ss to repeat the sentences a few
times before let them practice freely.
- Have Ss to work in pairs to practice .
- Have the whole class repeat all the
phrases to reinforce their pronunciation.
C. Home- link:
- Learn vocabulary and practice
introducing your school things
- Prepare lesson 2
- Ss look at the pictures
a,b,c,d,e
- Whole class to repeat each
line
- Ss practice in group, pair
- The others listen & give
the coment
- whole class repeat all the
phrases to reinforce their
pronunciation.
- Ss look at the pictures on
page 52 and identify the
characters in the pictures
- Ss to work in pairs (use
the words on the board).
- Ss trade their answers in
pairs for correction
- 6 – 7 pairs. The others
listen & give the coment
Date of planing : 3.11.2014
Date of teaching: 10.11.2014
Week 13
UNIT 8: THIS IS MY PEN
Lesson 2
I. Objectives:
- To identify school things.
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about school things
- Develop speaking, reading skills.
II. Teaching method:
- Communicative method.
- Techniques: + Ask and answer
+ Work in pairs and individually. Work in groups, discuss.
III. Teaching aids:
- Teacher’s aids: audio, stickers, puppets, flashcards.
- Students’ aids: book, notebook, workbook.
IV. Languages focus:
a. Vocabulary: plural nouns, these, those
b.Sentence patterns: These are my books
Those are my pencils
V. Procedures:
Time Steps/Activities Work
arrangement
1’
3’
10’
7’
5’
A.Class organization. Greeting
B. New lesson.
1. Warm up: jump words
1. ipecln.............. 2. arcyon...................
3. urrel................ 4. bbrrue...................
C .New lesson.
a.vocabulary
These Those They
Plural noun: book  books
pencil -> pencils
Pencil case -> pencil cases
* check vocabulary: Matching
b. set the scene
- Set the scene “you are going to listen to
Mai and robot talk about school things.
1. Look, listen and repeat.
- Play the recording and asks Ss to listen
to the tape twice.
- T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus
two times.
T elicits model sentences from students
These are my books
Those are my pencils
Giới thiệu đồ dùng học tập của mình :
These/ Those are my + plural noun
2. Look and say
Ask them to identify the characters in the
pictures and what they should say.
Fill the bubbles and have Ss to repeat the
lines a few times
Ask Ss to practice introducing their school
- T- wc
- T – Wc
- T – WC. Read new words
- Ss to identify the
characters in the picture on
page 54 and what they are
saying.
- Ss to listen to the tape
twice.
- whole class read each
sentence in chorus
- Ss look at the pictures
a,b,c,d,e
- Whole class to repeat each
line
- Ss practice in group, pair
8’
2’
things, using pictures
a. notebooks b. pens
- Call on some pairs to perform the task at
the front of the class.
3. Talk
- Have Ss look at the pictures on page
54 and identify the characters in the
pictures.
- Fill in the speech bubbles with the
correct phrases promted by Ss
- Have Ss to repeat the sentences a few
times before let them practice freely.
- Have Ss to work in pairs to practice .
- Call on a pair to demonstrate at the front
of the class.
- Have the whole class repeat all the
phrases to reinforce their pronunciation.
C. Home- link:
Learn vocabulary and practice introducing
your school things
Prepare lesson 3
c. pencil cases d. rubbers
- The others listen & give
the coment
- whole class repeat all the
phrases to reinforce their
pronunciation.
S1: These are my books
S1: Those are my pencils
S2: Are they?
S2: Are they?
S1: Yes, they are
S1:Yes,they are
- Ss to work in pairs
- Ss trade their answers in
pairs for correction
- 6 – 7 pairs. The others
listen & give the coment
Date of planing : 3.11.2014
Date of teaching: 11.11.2014
Week 13
UNIT 8: THIS IS MY PEN
Lesson 3
I. Objectives:
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to pronunciate the sound r, th
- Review how to introdure school things.
- Develop listening, writing skills.
II. Teaching method:
- Communicative method.
- Techniques: + Ask and answer
+ Work in pairs and individually. Work in groups, discuss.
III. Teaching aids:
- Teacher’s aids: audio, stickers, puppets, flashcards.
- Students’ aids: book, notebook, workbook.
IV. Languages focus:
a. Sentence Patterns: Are these your books? - Yes, they are/ No, they aren’t.
b. Phonics: ruler, these
V. Procedures:
Time Steps/Activities Work
arrangement
1’
5’
10’
7’
10’
2’
A.Class organization. Greeting
B. New lesson.
1. Warm up: board racing ( school things)
C .New lesson.
1. Listen and repeat
- Produce the sound of the letter r in the
word ruler and th in the word these
- Play the recording and asks Ss to listen
to the tape twice.
- T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus
two times.
2. Listen and write
- Ask Ss to say what they think about
when they hear the sound
- Play the recording all the way through
for Ss to listen
Answer: These are my ruler
Are those your books?
- Have the whole class read to
reinforce their pronunciation.
3. Let’s chant
- Play the recording all the way through
for Ss to listen while they are reading the
chant in their books
- Have Ss circle all the words containing
the focused sounds in the chant.
- Monitor the activity and offer help when
necessary/ correct typical pronunciation
errors.
- Call on a group to recite the chant.
- Have the whole class read to reinforce
their pronunciation.
C. Home- link:
- Practice more the structure
- Do the exercises in workbook
- T- wc
- T – Wc
- Ss open the book page 56,
look at the words ruler/
these and notice the letter
coloured differently in both
words.
- Ss listen and repeat :
Those are rulers
These are pens
- Ss write the words they
hear
- Compare with their
parners
- Ss to listen while they are
reading the chant in their
books
- Ss to listen to the tape
twice.
- whole class read each
sentence in chorus
- The others clap their hands
- Prepare unit 9
Date of planing : 15.11.2014
Date of teaching: 18.11.2014
Week 14
UNIT 9: WHAT COLOUR IS IT?
Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3
I. Objectives:
- By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about
school things.
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills
- Education: Ss love school subjects
II. Language Focus
- Sentence Partners: Is this your school bag? – Yes, it is/ No, it isn’t
- Vocabulary:
III. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
IV. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils talk about school things.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: read the chant
1. Look, listen and repeat.
- Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture
on page 58 and what they are saying.
- Set the scene “you are going to listen to Mai and
Nam ask and answer question about school
things.
- Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the
tape.
- Call on one pair. One repeats Mai’s part, the
other repeats Nam’s part.
- Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few
times to reinforce their pronunciation.
Read the chant
- Look at the pictures in the
book
- Ss to listen and repeat in
chorus two times.
- Listen and repeat
2. Point and say
- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 58. Elicit
the characters in the pictures and their names.
Model sentence: Is this your school bag?
– Yes, it is.
Is that your pen? – No, it isn’t.
- Model: Call on some Ss. Allocate the parts of the
characters Mai, Quan and Nam to the pupils. Ask
them to point the pictures and act out the
dialogues. Using the pictures in their books.
Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of
sounds, intonation) when necessary.
- Call on some Ss to perform their task in front of
the class.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in
chorus to reinforce their pronunciation.
3. Let’s Talk
Ask students to look at the pictures in the book.
Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures.
Call some pairs to act out
Correct their pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the
new words
- Pupils to guess and
complete the speech
bubbles.
- Look and find out the
model sentences
- Point the pictures and
practise
-The rest of the class
observe and give comments.
- Ss work in pairs.
- Pactise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
Date of planing : 15.11.2014
Date of teaching: 21.11.2014
Week 14
UNIT 9: WHAT COLOUR IS IT?
Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3
I. Objectives:
- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about
colours.
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.
- Education: Ss love school subjects and colours
II. Language Focus
- Sentence Partners: What colour is your box? – It’s red
What colour are your pencils? – They’re green.
- Vocabulary: colour, red, green, blue, white, yellow, brown, orange
III. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
IV. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Ask Ss to ask and answer questions about school things
3. New lesson:
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: talk about school things
1. Look, Listen and repeat.
- Have Ss to look at the book at page 60.
Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they
are saying.
- Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases
- Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines
in the speech bubbles two times.
- Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s
part and the other repeat Nam’ part.
- Play the recording again for the whole class to
repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce
their pronunciation.
2. Point and say
Have Ss look at the pictures on page 60
Teach vocabulary:
colour white Red yellow
Green brown Blue orange
- Elicits the structures
What colour is your box? – It’s red
What colour are your pencils? – They’re green
- Elicit the characters in the pictures and their
names. T models/ allocates the parts of characters
Mai and Nam to Ss
Practice
Look at the pictures in the
book
- Ss listen to the recording
as they read the lines in
the speech bubbles
- Listen and repeat
- Read in pairs
- Look at 4 pictures
- Ss to guess and complete
the speech bubbles.
- Repeat the step with
some other pairs for
- Ask them to act out the dialogue1.
- Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
intonation) when necessary.
- Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front
of the class.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in
chorus to reinforce their pronunciation.
3. Let’s talk:
- Show picture and give task.
Have Ps work in pair.
- Display in class, others comment
- Listen and correct.
- Have Ps practise
4. Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
pictures
- Ss practice acting out the
dialogue in pairs, using
the pictures.
- 6-7 pairs. The others
observe and give
comments.
- Point to the pictures and
practise
- Play role and speak out.
- Work in pair practice
talking.
Do exercises in the
workbook
Date of planing : 22.11.2014
Date of teaching: 25.11.2014
Week 15
UNIT 9: WHAT COLOUR IS IT?
Lesson 3: Part 1- 2-3
I. Objectives:
- By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about
school things and colours.
- Pronounce the sounds in the letters /m/, /p/ correctly .
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization: - Greeting
2. Oral test: - Have pupils write new words.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chatting
- T asks Ss to make question and answer about
colours
1. Listen and repeat
Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the
chant. Then change the role.
Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored
differently in the words it and orange
-Introduce the sounds /i/ and /o/
-Have Ps practice the sounds carefully
-Play the CD
-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are
similar to, and then have Ps read words after you
+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to
reinforce their pronunciation.
2. Listen and write
- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the
suitable words to fill in the blank.
- Play the recording 2 times.
- Play the recording again pupils check their
answers. T give the answer.
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’
comprehension of the listening text.
3. Let’s chant
- Introduce the Chant.
- Turn on the tape.
- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the
new words
Ask ps to practice in pairs
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
- Ps read the chant in chorus
- Some pairs to ask and
answer.
- Look at 2 sentences
- Listen and fill in the blank
- Check their guess.
Compare the answer with
the partner.
- Ps listen to the tape and
repeat the chant.
- Ps chant in group and
individual.
-The Ps chant and do the
action.
- Do exercises in the
workbook
Date of planing : 22.11.2014
Date of teaching: 28.11.2014
Week 15
UNIT 10: WHAT DO YOU DO AT BREAKTIME?
Lesson 1: 1-2-3
I. Objectives:
- By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about
break-time activities.
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills
- Education: Ss love subjects
II. Language Focus
- Sentence Partners: What do you do at break time? – I play badminton.
- Vocabulary: do, at break time, play, badminton, football, basketball, chess, table
tennis
III. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
IV. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils greet and introduce their names and their health.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Sing My new pen
1. Look, listen and repeat.
- Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture
a, b on page 64 and what they are saying.
- Set the scene “you are going to listen to Mai
and Linda and Phong ask and answer questions
about break time activities.
- Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the
tape.
- Call on one pair.
- Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few
times to reinforce their pronunciation. And do
the same with the dialogue between Linda and
Mai
2. Point and say
- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 12.
Elicit the characters in the pictures and their
names.
Teach vocabulary:
Play at break time chess
Badminton football do
Sing the song
Look at the pictures in the book
- Ss to listen and repeat in
chorus two times.
- One repeats Peter’s part, the
other repeats Nam’s part.
Basketball Table tennis
- Check vocab: what and where
Model sentence: What do you do at break
time?
I play football.
- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of
the characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask
them to point the pictures and act out the
dialogues. Using the pictures in their books.
Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of
sounds, intonation) when necessary.
- Call on some pairs to perform their task at the
fron of the class.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in
chorus to reinforce their pronunciation.
3. Let’s Talk
- Ask students to look at the pictures in the
book.
- Ask Ss work in pairs. Call some pairs to act
out
Correct their pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the
new words
Look and find out the model
sentences
- Pupils to guess and complete
the speech bubbles.
- Point the pictures and practise
- The rest of the class observe
and give comments.
- Identify the characters in the
pictures.
- Pactise in pairs
Do exercises in the workbook
Date of planing : 30.11.2014
Date of teaching: 2.12.2014
Week 16
UNIT 10: WHAT DO YOU DO AT BREAK TIME?
Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3
I. Objectives:
- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to express likes and dislikes.
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.
- Education: Ss love subject
II. Language Focus
- Sentence Partners: Do you like badminton? – Yes, I do./ No, I don’t.
- Vocabulary: like, let’s, now, skipping, skating, hide-and-seek, blind man’s bluff
III. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
IV. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Ask Ss to write the new words
3. New lesson:
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Ask and answer questions about
break time activities
1. Look, Listen and repeat.
- Have Ss to look at the book at page 66.
- Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they
are saying.
- Set the scene: we are going to learn new
phrases
- Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the
lines in the speech bubbles two times.
- Divide the class into two groups. One repeat
Mai’s part and the other repeat Linda’ part.
Play the recording again for the whole class to
repeat each line in the speech bubbles to
reinforce their pronunciation.
Teach vocabulary:
Like let’s Skipping skating
Hide-and-seek blind man’s bluff
 Elicits the structures
Do you like badminton? – Yes, I do.
Do you like hide- and- seek? - No, I don’t
2. Point and say
- Have Ss look at the pictures on page 66
- Elicit the characters in the pictures and their
names.
- T models/ allocates the parts of characters Mai,
Linh and Nam to Ss.
- Ask them to act out the dialogue1.
Practice in pairs
- Look at the pictures in the
book
- Ss listen to the recording as
they read the lines in the
speech bubbles
- Listen and repeat
Read in pairs
- Ss to guess and complete
the speech bubbles.
- Repeat the step with some
other pairs for pictures
- Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of
sounds, intonation) when necessary.
- Call on some pairs to perform the task at the
front of the class.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in
chorus to reinforce their pronunciation.
3. Let’s talk:
Show picture and give task.
Have Ps work in pair.
- Display in class. Others comment.
- Listen and correct.
- Have Ps practise
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the
new words
- Ss practice acting out the
dialogue in pairs, using the
pictures.
- The others observe and give
comments.
Look at 4 pictures
- Point to the pictures and
practise
- Play role and speak out.
- Work in pair practice
talking.
- Do exercises in the
workbook
Date of planing : 2.12.2014
Date of teaching: 5.12.2014
Week 16
UNIT 10: WHAT DO YOU DO AT BREAK TIME?
Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3
I. Objectives:
- By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about break
time activities, express likes and dislikes.
- Pronounce the sounds in the letters /bl/, /sk/ correctly .
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills.
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils to write new words.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: sing Hide-and-seek song
1. Listen and repeat
- Play the CD .
- Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored
differently in the words blind and skating
-Introduce the sounds /bl/ and /sk/
-Have Ps practice the sounds carefully
-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.
-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are
similar to, and then have Ps read words after T
+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to
reinforce their pronunciation.
2. Listen and write
- Have pupils look at the
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill
the blanks. Check their guess.
- Play the recording again pupils check their
answers. T give the answer:
- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or
groups for correction.
3. Let’s chant
- Introduce the Chant.
- Turn on the tape.
- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the
new words
- Sing the song
- Look at the pictures in the
book
- Ps repeat each line of the
chant. Then change the role.
- Listen and repeat
- Look at 2 sentences
- Listen and fill in the blank
- Compare the answer with
the partner.
- Ps listen to the tape and
repeat the chant.
- Ps chant in group and
individual.
-The Ps chant and do the
action.
Do exercises in the
workbook
Date of planing : 7.12.2014
Date of teaching: 9.12.2014
Week 17
REVIEW 2
UNITS SIX TO TEN
I.Objectives:
- To review the phonics, the vocabulary and the sentence patterns learnt in units
6 – 10.
- Develop speaking, reading and writing skills.
- Help Ss to study hardly.
II.Teaching methods:
- Communicative method.
- Techniques: + Work in pairs.
+ Work in groups, discuss.
III.Teaching aids:
- Teacher’s aids: books, pictures, poster, word cards.
- Students’ aids: book, notebook, workbook.
IV.Languages focus:
Unit six: Stand up
- Giving and responding to instructions
- Asking for and giving permission
1. Stand up!
2. May i sit down? Yes, you can/ No, you can’t.
Unit 7: That’s my school
- naming school rooms
- describing school rooms
- asking and answering about school rooms.
1. Is this a classroom ? - Yes, it is
2. Is it new ? - Yes, it is. ( no, it isn’t). it’s old
Unit 8 : This is my pen
- Naming school rooms.
- Describing school rooms
- Asking and answering about school rooms
1- Is this/ that your school things ?
2. These/ those are + school things ?
Unit 9 : what colour is it?
- Review asking and answering questions about school things.
- Review asking and answering questions about colour.
Unit 10 : Our Break Time
Naming games and activities
Saying the name of games/ activities at break time
Asking and answering about games and activities at break time.
1. What do you do at break time ?
I play hide – and – seek.
I like playing football/ badminton.
2. Do you like playing chess ?
V. Procedures:
Time Steps/Activities Work
arrangement
4’
9’
9’
10’
Warm up
Let’s Ss chant in two groups. Which is more correct
is the winner.
1.New lesson.
1. Phonics
- Put the piece of paper with the phonics written on it
on the board and play the recording all the way
through.
- pupils listen to the recording, pointing to the
appropriate words on the board.
- Draw pupils’ attention to difficult sounds such as
which, pens, pencils, break.
- Pupils practice saying the focused words in pairs.
Monitor the activity.
- Correct their pronunciation as necessary.
- Call some pair to demonstrate at the front of the class.
Have the rest of the class observe and give comment.
2. Vocabulary
- Put the vocabulary sheet of the paper on the board.
Pupils recall the meaning of the word by reading aloud
or playing a game( Pass the word, Crossword puzzle,
Slap the board) using flashcards.
- Pupils read the words aloud again. Encourage them to
group the words into categories: words denoting
names, greeting, activities.
- Have pupils make sentences with some of words they
have learnt.
3. Sentence patterns
- Put the sheet of the paper which contains sentence
patterns on the board. Play the recording all the way
through. Pupils listen to recording as they follow the
appropriate line on the board. Replay recording for
pupils to repeat each line.
- Pupils work in pairs or groups to make dialogues with
the appropriate sentence patterns on the board. Then
they rehearse their work.
- Groups
- Whole
class
Pair work
T –whole class
Whole class
Pair work/
group work
Whole class
Pair work/
group work
2’
1’
- Have some pairs demonstrate their work at the front
of the class.
2. Summary:
Ss have learnt how to talk about some games.
3. Homework :
Review from unit 1 to unit 10
individual
Date of planing : 7.12.2014
Date of teaching: 12.12.2014
Week 17
REVIEW 2
I. Objectives:
- By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:
- Perform their abilities in listening, speaking and writing related to the topics from
units 6-10, using the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns they have learnt.
- Develop Ss speaking, listening and writing skills.
- Education: Ss love school subjects
II. Language Focus
- Sentence Partners: Revisions.
- Vocabulary: Revisions.
III. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
IV. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
-Ask Ss to write the new words and do exercises in workbook
3. New lesson:
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: - Review the model sentences from
unit1 to unit 5
1. Listen and tick
- Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 on
page 70 of the Student Book. Give the
identification of the characters in the pictures and
Ask ps to practice in pairs
- Look at pictures 1, 2, 3, 4
and 5 on page 70 of the
Student Book.
the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are
going to listen to the recording and tick the
pictures they hear.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
tick the boxes.
- Play the recording again pupils check their
answers. T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’
comprehension of the listening text.
Answers: 1 – c; 2 – d; 3 – b; 4 – a.
2. Listen and number
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page
of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’
words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to
the recording and match the information they hear
to the pictures. They should number the boxes.
Guess the answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the boxes.
- Play the recording again pupils check their
answers. T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’
comprehension of the listening text.
Answer: 1. 2. 3. 4.
3. Read and complete
-T explains the situation and how to do the
exercise.
-Ask students to read the dialogue in the book and
fill the words given to complete the dialogue.
- Correct the pronunciation.
Answer: 1. school 2. Playground 3. room 4.
Quan
4. Read and match
- Whole class. Have pupils turn their books to
page 37. Tell pupils that they are going to read the
sentences to get the information in order to match
the sentences to the sentences.
- Monitor the activity and offer help when
necessary.
- Give the identification
- Guess the answer
- Listen and tick
- Check their answer.
Compare the answer with
the partner.
- Ss look at pictures a, b, c
and d on page of the Student
Book. Elicit the
identification of the
characters in the pictures
and the characters’ words
- Work individually
Listen and tick
- Check their guess.
Compare the answer with
the partner.
- Work individually
- Work in pairs to do the
exercise then practice in
pairs in front of the whole
class. The rest listen to and
give the remark.
- Pupils read the sentences
individually and do the task.
- Have pupils trade their answers for correction.
- Call on some pupils to report their answers.
- Make a few questions to check pupils’
comprehension of the sentences.
- Have the whole class read each sentence in
chorus to reinforce their pronunciation.
Answer: 1.e 2. c 3. a 4.c 5. d
5. Look and say
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on Page
71.
- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the
characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to
act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their
books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of
sounds, intonation) when necessary.
- Call on some pairs to perform their task in front
of the class.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in
chorus to reinforce their pronunciation.
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the
new words
- Work in pairs
- The rest of the class listen
give comments.
- Elicit the characters in the
pictures and their names
then guess and complete the
speech bubbles.
- Pair works
- 6 -7 pairs. The rest of the
class observe and give
comments.
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 18
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 70: UNIT 11: THIS IS MY FAMILY.
Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: identify family
members.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners: Who’s that?- He’s my father./ She’s my mother.
- Vocabulary: man, next to, him, father, mother, young, nice, sister, brother,
grandmother, grandfather, he, she
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils answer T’s questions.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chatting
1. Look, listen and repeat.
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on
page 6 and what they are saying.
Set the scene “you are going to listen to Linda and
Mai identify family members.
Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.
T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.
Call on one pair. One repeats Linda’s part, the other
repeats Mai’s part.
Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to
reinforce their pronunciation.
2. Point and say
- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 6. Elicit the
characters in the pictures and their names.
Teach vocabulary:
man next to
father mother
young nice
sister brother
grandmother grandfather
he she
check vocab: slap the board
Model sentence: Who’s that?
- He’s my father./ She’s my mother.
Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the
characters the boy and the girl to the pupils. Ask them
to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using
Pair works
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Look and find out the
model sentences
Point the pictures and
the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and
offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress,
assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary.
- Call on some pairs to perform their task at the fron of
the class. The rest of the class observe and give
comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
3 Let’s Talk
Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask
them to identify the characters in the pictures.
Ask Ss work in pairs. Call some pairs to act out
Correct their pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
practise
Pactise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 71: UNIT 11: THIS IS MY FAMILY.
Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to identify family
members.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss reading and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners
- Vocabulary: photo, woman, girl, boy, her, family
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils greet and introduce their names.
3. New lesson:
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up
Ask and answer about Ss’ name
4. Listen and tick
- Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page 7 of the
Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in
the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that
they are going to listen to the recording and tick the
pictures they hear. Guess the answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the
boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the
partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T
give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of
the listening text.
5. Read and complete
- Have pupils open their books to Page 7. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the pictures and who they are in
the photo.
Teach vocabulary:
Photo woman
Girl boy
Her family
Happy of
Check vocab: what and where
- Tell Ss that they are going look the photo and read the
sentences to get information to write the missing words.
- Ss read silently and complete the dialogues.
- Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for
correction
Greeting
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Listen and tick
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Work individually
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The
others listen and give comments.
Answers: 1. Father 2. Mother 3. brother
- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the reading text.
Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
6. Let’s sing
- Introduce A happy family song, Page 7.
- Play the recording and listen to A happy faamily song
- Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of
the rhythm.
- Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the
actions. The others clap their hands after the song
- Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the
actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them
when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors.
- Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the
class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the
rhythm.
- Have class sing the song again to reinforce their
pronunciation.
4.Consolidation
Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.
- Retell the content of the lesson.
5. Homework
Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new
words and structures.
Listen and sing
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK: 18
Date of preparing: 24/ 8/ 2012
Date of teaching: Monday, August 27th
2012.
Period 73: UNIT 11: THIS IS MY FAMILY.
Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge:
- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to talk about the ages of family
members.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners: How old is your brother? – He is seven.
- Vocabulary: eleven, twelve, thirteen, fourteen, fifteen, seventeen, eighteen,
nineteen, twenty, thirty, forty, fifty, sixty, seventy, eighty, ninety, one hundred
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Ask Ss to greet to each other
3. New lesson:
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Sing A happy family song
1. Look, Listen and repeat.
Have Ss to look at the book at page 8.
Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are
saying.
Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases
Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines
in the speech bubbles
Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in
the speech bubbles two times.
Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s
part and the other repeat Linda’s part.
Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat
each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their
pronunciation.
- Teach vocabulary:
Eleven twelve
Thirteen fourteen
Fifteen seventeen
Eighteen nineteen
Twenty thirty
Sing the song
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Read in pairs
Forty fifty
Sixty seventy
Eighty ninety
one hundred
Check vocab: rub out and remember
- Elicits the structures
How old is your brother? – He is seven
2. Point and say
Have Ss look at the pictures on page 8
Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names.
Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
T models/ allocates the parts of characters the boy
and the girl to Ss
Ask them to act out the dialogue. Repeat the step
with some other pairs for pictures
Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs,
using the pictures.
Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
intonation) when necessary.
Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of
the class. The others observe and give comments.
Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
3 - Let’s talk:
Show picture and give task. Talk about the age of
Nam’s family
Have Ps work in pair.
- Display in class, others comment
Listen and correct.
Have Ps practise
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Look at 4 pictures
Point to the pictures and
practise
Play role and speak out.
Work in pair practice
talking:
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 18
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 74: UNIT 11: THIS IS MY FAMILY.
Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge:
- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to talk about the age of family
members.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary: picture, years old
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils introduce their family members.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Talk about the age of family members.
4. Listen and number
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page of
the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and match the information they hear to the
pictures. They should number the boxes.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the
answer with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
Practise in pairs
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and number
of the listening text.
6. Read and complete
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on
page 9.
Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph
to get the information in order to fill the ages of
Quan’s family members
Have a revision of the language
Ask Ss to read the dialogues and do the task (match
the sentence with a appropriate picture.)
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
Answers: Quan-10; His father-forty-four; His
mother-thirty-nine; His brother-fourteen
6. Write about your family
- Have pupils open their books to Page 9. Get Ss to
answer the ages of their family members - Pupils
practice in pairs and complete the dialogues.
- Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction.
- Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the
class. The rest of the class listen and give comments.
- Make a few questions to check pupils’
comprehension of the reading text.
- Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Ps answer
Look at 3 pictures
Work Individually
Read the paragraph
Practise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 19
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 75: UNIT 11: THIS IS MY FAMILY.
Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: identify family
members, talk about the ages of family members. Pronounce the sounds in the
letters /br/, /gr/ correctly .
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils to talk about the ages of family members.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chatting: identify family members, talk
about the ages of family members
1. Listen and repeat
Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant.
Then change the role.
Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in
the words brother and grandmother
-Introduce the sounds /br/ and /gr/
-Have Ps practice the sounds carefully
-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.
-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are
similar to, and then have Ps read words after you
+ Ask some pairs to ask and answer.
+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to
reinforce their pronunciation.
2. Listen and write
- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the
Ask ps to practice in pairs
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Look at 2 sentences
suitable words to fill in the blank.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the
blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with
the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups
for correction.
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
Answer:
3. Let’s chant
- Introduce the Chant.
- Turn on the tape.
- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.
- Ps chant in group and individual.
-The Ps chant and do the action.
- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Listen and fill in the blank
Ps listen to the tape and
chant
Do exercises in the
workbook
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 76: UNIT 11: THIS IS MY FAMILY.
Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: identify family
members, talk about the ages of family members.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss reading, writing skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils identify family members, talk about the ages of family members.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Read the chant
4. Read and match.
T introduces the topic “you are going to read the
questions to get the information in order to match the
answers”.
Ss read the sentences individually and check their
prediction. Ss do the task (match the sentence with a
appropriate picture.)
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
Answers: 1 – d; 2 – a; 3 – b; 4 – c.
5. Read and complete
-T explains the situation and how to do the exercise
-Ask students to look the photo of Linda’s family Ask
Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on page 11.
read the paragraph in the book and fill the suitable
words to complete the dialogue.
Work individually to do the exercise then practice in
front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the
remark.
Correct the pronunciation.
Answer: 1. family 2. father 3. mother 4. brother
5. sister
Read the chant
Look at the sentences in
the book
Read and Work
individually
Work in pairs
Fill the suitable words in
the blanks
6. Project
- Introduce the situation.
- Explain how to do the exercise: draw their family.
Tell the classmates about it
-Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and
give the remark. Correct the pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Work individually
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 19
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 77: UNIT 12: THIS IS MY HOUSE.
Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able rooms in the house.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners: There is a living room.
- Vocabulary: house, garden, over there, kitchen, bathroom, bedroom, dining room,
garden
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils greet and introduce their names and their health.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Read the chant
1. Look, listen and repeat.
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on
Read the chant
Look at the pictures in the
page 12 and what they are saying.
Set the scene “you are going to listen to Linda and
Mai greet and introduce their names.
Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.
T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.
Call on one pair. One repeats Linda’s part, the other
repeats Mai’s part.
Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to
reinforce their pronunciation.
2. Point and say
- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 12. Elicit the
characters in the pictures and their names.
Teach vocabulary:
House garden
over there kitchen
bathroom bedroom
dining room garden
check vocab: slap the board
Model sentence: There is a living room.
Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the
characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to
point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the
pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer
help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation
of sounds, intonation) when necessary.
- Call on some pairs to perform their task at the fron of
the class. The rest of the class observe and give
comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
3 Let’s Talk
Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask
them to identify the characters in the pictures.
Ask Ss work in pairs to identify the rooms in Nam’s
house. Call some pairs to act out
Correct their pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
book
Listen and repeat
Look and find out the
model sentences
Point the pictures and
practise
Pactise in pairs
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Do exercises in the
workbook
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 78: UNIT 12: THIS IS MY HOUSE.
Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to indentify rooms in the
house.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners
- Vocabulary: way, clean, early, in the morning
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils write the new words.
3. New lesson:
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up
Talk about their houses
4. Listen and tick
- Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page 13 of the
Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in
the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that
Ss practise
Indentify the characters
in each picture
they are going to listen to the recording and tick the
pictures they hear. Guess the answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the
boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the
partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T
give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of
the listening text.
5. Look and write
- Have pupils open their books to Page 13. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the pictures and what they are
saying.
- Tell Ss that they are going to look the pictures, read
and get information to write the missing words in the
sentences.
- Ss read silently and complete the dialogues.
- Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for
correction
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The
others listen and give comments.
Answers: 1. A house 2. A living room
3.a kitchen 4. Bedroom
5. a bathroom 6.a kitchen
- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the reading text.
Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
6. Let’s sing
- Introduce The way I clean my house song, Page 13.
- Play the recording and listen to The song
- Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of
the rhythm.
- Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the
actions. The others clap their hands after the song
- Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the
actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them
when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors.
- Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the
class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the
Listen and tick
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Work individually
Listen and sing
rhythm.
- Have class sing the song again to reinforce their
pronunciation.
4.Consolidation
Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.
- Retell the content of the lesson.
5. Homework
Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new
words and structures.
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK: 20
Date of preparing: 24/ 8/ 2012
Date of teaching: Monday, August 27th
2012.
Period 79: UNIT 12: THIS IS MY HOUSE.
Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge:
- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about
house facilities.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners: Is there a fence?-Yes, there is./ No, there isn’t.
- Vocabulary: fence, pond, gate, yard, fence
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Ask Ss to greet to each other
3. New lesson:
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Sing the alphabet song Sing the song
1.Look, Listen and repeat.
Have Ss to look at the book at page 14.
Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are
saying.
Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrase
Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines
in the speech bubbles
Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in
the speech bubbles two times.
Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Tony’s
part and the other repeat Nam’s part.
Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat
each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their
pronunciation.
- Teach vocabulary:
Fence pond
Gate yard
fence
- Elicits the structures
Is there a fence?-Yes, there is./ No, there isn’t.
2. Point and say
Have Ss look at the pictures on page 14
Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names.
Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
T models/ allocates the parts of characters the boys
and the girl to Ss
Ask them to act out the dialogue1. Repeat the step
with some other pairs for pictures
Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs,
using the pictures.
Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
intonation) when necessary.
Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of
the class. The others observe and give comments.
Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
3 - Let’s talk:
Show picture and give task.
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Read in pairs
Look at 4 pictures
Point to the pictures and
practise
Play role and speak out.
Have Ps work in pair to talk about Tony’s house
- Display in class, others comment
Listen and correct.
Have Ps practise
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Work in pair practice
talking:
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 20
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 80: UNIT 12: THIS IS MY HOUSE.
Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge:
- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about
house facilities.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners: There is not a yard
- Vocabulary: any, around, but, beautiful, in front of, tree, in
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students’ attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils greet and introduce, spell their names.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Sing the song Sing the song
4. Listen and number
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 15
of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and match the information they hear to the
pictures. They should number the boxes.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the
answer with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
5.Read and complete
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on
page 15.
Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph
about Phong’s house facilities to get the information
in order to fill the given words in the blanks.”
Teach vocabulary:
Any around
But beautiful
in front of tree
in
Check vocab: what and where
Model sentence: There is not a yard
Have a revision of the language
Ask Ss to read the paragraph about Phong’s house
facilities and fill the given words in the blanks.
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
Answers: 1. House; 2. Beautiful; 3. Tree; 4. Pond
6. Write about your house
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and number
Ps answer
Look at 4 pictures
Work Individually
Read the paragraph and do
the exercise
- Have pupils open their books to Page 15. Get Ss to
read the questions and answer about their houses
facilities.
- Pupils practice in pairs to ask and answer questions
about their houses.
- Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction.
- Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the
class. The rest of the class listen and give comments.
- Ask Ss to talk about their houses.
- Have the whole class listen and reinforce their
pronunciation.
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Practise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 21
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 81: UNIT 12: THIS IS MY HOUSE.
Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to identify rooms in the
house, ask and answer questions about house facilities. Pronounce the sounds in
the letters ch/ /, th/ / correctly.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary: behind
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students’ attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils write the new words.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up:
- T asks Ss to make question and answer about houses
1. Listen and repeat
Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant.
Then change the role.
Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in
the words kitchen and bathroom
-Introduce the sounds ch/ / and th/ /
-Have Ps practice the sounds carefully
-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.
-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are
similar to, and then have Ps read words after you
+ Ask some pairs to ask and answer.
+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to
reinforce their pronunciation.
2. Listen and write
- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the
suitable words to fill in the blank.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the
blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with
the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups
for correction.
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
Answer:
3. Let’s chant
- Introduce the Chant.
- Turn on the tape.
- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.
- Ps chant in group and individual.
-The Ps chant and do the action.
- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
Ask ps to practice in pairs
Listen and repeat
Look at 2 sentences
Listen and fill in the blank
Ps listen to the tape and
chant
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 21
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 82: UNIT 12: THIS IS MY HOUSE.
Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: identify rooms in the
house, ask and answer questions about house facilities.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss reading, writing skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils talk about their house facilities.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Read the chant.
4. Read and write.
T introduces the topic “you are going to read the
paragraph to get the information in order to find the
suitable words to fill in the blanks”.
Ss look at Mai’s house and find the house facilities
read the paragraph individually and check their
answers. Ss do the task
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Read the chant
Read the paragraph in the
book
Read and Work
individually
Work in group
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
Answers: 1. house; 2. pond; 3. tree; 4. living.
5. Read again and write the answers
-T explains the situation and how to do the exercise
-Ask students to read the paragraph in part 4 in the
book of page 17 and answer the questions.
Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs
in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give
the remark.
Correct the pronunciation.
Answer: 1. No, it isn’t. 2. It is blue.
3. Yes, there is. 4. Yes, there is.
5. No, there isn’t
6. Project
- Introduce the situation.
- Explain how to do the exercise: Draw and colour
their houses. Write the names of the rooms in the
houses
-Ss introduce their houses in front of the class. The
rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the
pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Read the paragraph and
answer the questions in
pairs
Work individually
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 21
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 83: UNIT 13: WHERE’S MY BOOK?
Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer
questions about the location of things in the house.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners: Where’s the book?-It’s here/there.
- Vocabulary: Where, chair, poster, bed, picture, coat, ball, here, there
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils describe their houses.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Read the chant
1. Look, listen and repeat.
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on
page 18 and what they are saying.
Set the scene “you are going to listen to Peter and his
mother ask and answer questions about the location of
things in the house.
Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.
T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.
Call on one pair. One repeats Peter’s part, the other
repeats his mother’s part.
Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to
reinforce their pronunciation.
2. Point and say
- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 12. Elicit the
characters in the pictures and their names.
Teach vocabulary:
Where chair
Poster bed
Picture coat
Ball here
there
Read the chant
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Check vocab: what and where
Model sentence: Where’s the book?-It’s here/there.
Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
- Model: Call someone to practice in front of the
whole class. Practice in group. Allocate the parts of
the characters the boy and the girl to the pupils. Ask
them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues.
Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity
and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress,
assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary.
- Call on some groups to perform their task at the front
of the class. The rest of the class observe and give
comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
3 Let’s Talk
Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask
them to identify the characters in the pictures.
Ask Ss work in pair to ask and answer questions about
the location of things in the house.. Call some pairs to
act out
Correct their pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Look and find out the
model sentences
Point the pictures and
practise
Pactise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 21
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 84: UNIT 13: WHERE’S MY BOOK?
Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer
questions about the location of things in the house.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils to ask and answer a bout he specific information.
3. New lesson:
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up
Ask and answer about Ss’ name and spell it
4. Listen and tick
- Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page19 of the
Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in
the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that
they are going to listen to the recording and tick the
pictures they hear. Guess the answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the
boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the
partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T
give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of
the listening text.
5. Read and complete
- Have pupils open their books to Page 19. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the pictures and what they are
saying mention the distance between the hand and the
thing in picture.
- Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information
to write the given words in sentences 1, 2, 3 and 4.
- Ss read silently and complete the sentences.
- Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for
correction
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The
others listen and give comments.
Answers: 1. Here 2. There 3. Here 4. there
Greeting
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Listen and tick
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Work individually
Work in pairs
- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the reading text.
Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
6. Let’s sing
- Introduce the The poster and the ball song, Page 19.
- Play the recording and listen the How are you? song
- Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of
the rhythm.
- Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the
actions. The others clap their hands after the song
- Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the
actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them
when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors.
- Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the
class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the
rhythm.
- Have class sing the song again to reinforce their
pronunciation.
4.Consolidation
Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.
- Retell the contain of the lesson.
5. Homework
Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new
words and structures.
Listen and sing
Do exercises in the
Workbook
WEEK: 22
Date of preparing: 24/ 8/ 2012
Date of teaching: Monday, August 27th
2012.
Period 85: UNIT 13: WHERE’S MY BOOK?
Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge:
- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer question about
the location of things in the house (plural).
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners: Where are the posters? –They are under my bed.
- Vocabulary: near, under, on, behind, look in
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Ask Ss to ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house.
3. New lesson:
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Sing the poster and the ball song
2. Look, Listen and repeat.
Have Ss to look at the book at page 20.
Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are
saying.
Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases
Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines
in the speech bubbles
Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in
the speech bubbles two times.
Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Peter’s
part and the other repeat his mother’s part.
Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat
each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their
pronunciation.
- Teach vocabulary:
Near under
On behind
look in preposition(prep)
Check vocab: slap the board
- Elicits the structures
Where are the posters? –They are under my bed.
2. Point and say
Have Ss look at the pictures on page 20
Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names.
Sing the song
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Read in pairs
Look at 4 pictures
Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
T models/ allocates the parts of characters Quan and
Linda to Ss use structure:
Where are the posters? –They are under my bed.
Ask them to act out the model dialogue. Repeat the
step with some other pairs for pictures
Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue point and
use the information in picture a, b, c and d in pairs.
Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
intonation) when necessary.
Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of
the class. The others observe and give comments.
Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
3 - Let’s talk:
Show picture and give task.
Have Ps work in pair to ask and answer questions
about the location of things in the house.
- Display in class, others comment
Listen and correct.
Have Ps practise
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Point to the pictures and
practise
Practice in pairs
Play role and speak out.
Work in pair practice
talking:
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 22
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 86: UNIT 3: WHERE’S MY BOOK?
Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge:
- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about
the location of things in the house (plural)
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss reading, listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary: bed, ball
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils write the new words.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: ask and answer questions about the
location of things in the house
4. Listen and number
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 21
of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and match the information they hear to the
pictures. They should number the boxes.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the
answer with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
5. Read and complete
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on
page 21.
Set the scene: “you are going to read and questions
the paragraph about phong’s room and find out the
answer.”
Have a revision of the language:
Ask Ss to read the dialogues and answer. Monitor the
activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Practise in pairs
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and number
Ps answer
Look at the picture
Work In pairs
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
Answers: 1. It is on the bed.
2, They are under the bed
3, They are near the desk.
4, They are on the desk.
5, They are on the wall
6. Write about your bedroom
- Explain how to do the exercise
T introduces the topic “you are going to write the
paragraph about their houses”
Ss read the sentences individually and do the exercise.
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Read the dialogues in
pairs
Work individually
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 22
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 87 UNIT 13: WHERE’S MY BOOK?
Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer
questions about the location of things in the house. Pronounce the sounds in the
letters / /, / / correctly .
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils write the new words.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: ask and answer questions about the
location of things in the house
1. Listen and repeat
Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant.
Then change the role.
Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in
the words chair and where
-Introduce the sounds / / and / /
-Have Ps practice the sounds carefully
-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.
-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are
similar to, and then have Ps read words after you
+ Ask some pairs to ask and answer.
+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to
reinforce their pronunciation.
2. Listen and write
- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the
suitable words to fill in the blank.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the
blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with
the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups
for correction.
Ask ps to practice in pairs
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Look at 2 sentences
Listen and fill in the blank
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
Answer:
3. Let’s chant
- Introduce the Chant.
- Turn on the tape.
- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.
- Ps chant in group and individual.
-The Ps chant and do the action.
- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Ps listen to the tape and
chant
Do exercises in the
workbook
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 88: UNIT 13: WHERE’S MY BOOK?
Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer
questions about the location of things in the house
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss reading, writing skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: read chant.
4. Read and tick.
T explains the situation and how to do the exercise
-Ask students to read the paragraph and choose the
suitable picture.
Work in groups to do the exercise then explain how to
choose the picture in front of the whole class. The rest
listen to and give the remark.
Correct the pronunciation
Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the reading text
Answers: picture c.
5.Read and write
T introduces the topic “you are going to read the
sentences and find the suitable words to fill in the
blanks”.
Ss read the sentences individually and do the exercise.
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
6. Project
- Introduce the situation.
- Explain how to do the exercise: draw your bedroom
and describe it to your classmates
- Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others
listen and comment.
- Correct Ss’ mistakes and pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Read chant
Look at the sentences in
the book
Read and Work
individually
Work individually
Fill the suitable words in
the blanks
Work individually
Work individually
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 23
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 89: UNIT 14: ARE THERE ANY POSTERS IN THE ROOM?
Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer
questions about things in the room.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners: Are there any posters in the room?
- Yes, there are/ No, there aren’t
- Vocabulary: any, map, sofa, wardrobe, cupboard
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils describe their houses.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: read the chant
1. Look, listen and repeat.
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on
page 24 and what they are saying.
Set the scene “you are going to listen to Linda and Mai
ask and answer questions about things in the room.
Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.
T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.
Call on one pair. One repeats Linda’s part, the other
repeats Mai’s part.
Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to
reinforce their pronunciation.
2. Point and say
- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 24. Elicit the
characters in the pictures and their names.
Read the chant
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Teach vocabulary:
Any map
Sofa wardrobe
cupboard
Check vocab: what and where
Model sentence: Are there any posters in the room?
- Yes, there are/ No, there aren’t
Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the
characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to
point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the
pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer
help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation
of sounds, intonation) when necessary.
- Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front
of the class. The rest of the class observe and give
comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
3 Let’s Talk
Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask
them to identify the characters in the pictures.
Ask Ss work in pairs to ask and answer questions
about things in the room. Call some pairs to act out
Correct their pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Look and find out the
model sentences
Point the pictures and
practise
Pactise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 23
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 90: UNIT 14: ARE THERE ANY POSTERS IN THE ROOM?
Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer
questions about things in the room.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils write the new words.
3. New lesson:
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: ask and answer questions about things in the
room.
4. Listen and tick
- Have pupils look at pictures 1 and 2 on page 25 of the
Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in
the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that
they are going to listen to the recording and tick the
pictures they hear. Guess the answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the
boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the
partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T
give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of
the listening text.
5. Look, read and write
- Have pupils open their books to Page 25. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the pictures and what are there in
the picture.
- Tell Ss that they are going to read the sentences and
write the missing words to fill in the blanks.
- Ss read silently and complete the sentences.
- Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for
correction
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The
Practise in pairs
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Listen and tick
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Work in pairs
others listen and give comments.
Answers: 2. Cupboard 3. Map 4. chairs
- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the reading text.
Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
6. Let’s write
- Have pupils open their books to Page 25. Get Ss to read
the questions and use the real things in their houses to
answer them.
- Tell Ss that they are going to read and answer the
questions
- Ss read silently and answer questions.
- Ss trade their answers within pairs for correction
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The
others listen and give comments.
4.Consolidation
Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.
- Retell the content of the lesson.
5. Homework
Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new
words and structures.
Answer the questions
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK: 23
Date of preparing: 24/ 8/ 2012
Date of teaching: Monday, August 27th
2012.
Period 91: UNIT 14: ARE THERE ANY POSTERS IN THE ROOM?
Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge:
- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about
quantity of things.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners: How many chairs are there? - There are six.
- Vocabulary: How many, cup, fan, mirror, door, window, count
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Ask Ss to greet to each other
3. New lesson:
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Sing the alphabet song
1.Look, Listen and repeat.
Have Ss to look at the book at page 26.
Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are
saying.
Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases
Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines
in the speech bubbles
Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in
the speech bubbles two times.
Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Peter’s
part and the other repeat Nam’s part.
Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat
each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their
pronunciation.
- Teach vocabulary:
How many cup
Fan mirror
Door window
count
- Elicits the structures
How many chairs are there? - There are six
2. Point and say
Have Ss look at the pictures on page 26
Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names.
Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
T models/ allocates the parts of characters the boy
and the girl to Ss
Ask them to act out the dialogue. Repeat the step
Sing the song
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Read in pairs
Look at 4 pictures
with some other pairs for pictures
Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs,
using the pictures.
Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
intonation) when necessary.
Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of
the class. The others observe and give comments.
Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
3 - Let’s talk:
Show picture and give task.
Have Ps work in pair to ask and answer questions
about quantity of things.
- Display in class, others comment
Listen and correct.
Have Ps practise
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Point to the pictures and
practise
Play role and speak out.
Work in pair practice
talking:
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 23
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 92: UNIT 14: ARE THERE ANY POSTERS IN THE ROOM?
Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge:
- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about
quantity of things.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils write the new words.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chatting
- T asks Ss to ask and answer questions about quantity
of things.
4. Listen and number
- Have pupils look at picture on page 27 of the Student
Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the
picture and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they
are going to listen to the recording and number the
things they listen to. They should number the things.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the things. Check their guess. Compare the
answer with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
5.Read and write
Ask Ss to read the paragraph and find out the
information to answer the questions.
Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph
to get the information in order to answer the
questions”
Have a revision of the language.
Ask Ss to read the paragraph and do the task
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Practise in pairs
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and number
Ps answer
Look at 3 pictures
Work Individually
Read the paragraph, ask
and answer questions in
pairs
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
Answers: 1. There is one door.
2. There are two windows.
3. There are eight chairs.
4. There are four pictures.
5. There are two fans.
6. Let’s play
- Introduce the game Spot the difference to pupils.
- Explain how the game is played. Pupils find out the
difference things in the pictures
- Pupils play the game then report in front of the class.
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary.
- When the time is up, call on some Ss to demonstrate
the game at the front of the class. The rest of the class
observe and give comments.
- Correct the mistake and pronunciation if necessary.
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Work individually
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 24
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 93: UNIT 14: ARE THERE ANY POSTERS IN THE ROOM?
Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer
questions about quantity of things, things in the room. Pronounce the sounds in the
letters / /, / / correctly.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils ask and answer questions about quantity of things.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chatting
- T asks Ss to describe their rooms
1. Listen and repeat
Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant.
Then change the role.
Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in
the words fan and cup
-Introduce the sounds / / and / /
-Have Ps practice the sounds carefully
-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.
-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are
similar to, and then have Ps read words after you
+ Ask some pairs to ask and answer.
+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to
reinforce their pronunciation.
2. Listen and write
- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the
suitable words to fill in the blank.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the
blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with
the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups
for correction.
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
Answer:
3. Let’s chant
- Introduce the Chant.
Ask ps to practice
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Look at 2 sentences
Listen and fill in the blank
- Turn on the tape.
- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.
- Ps chant in group and individual.
- Ps chant and do the action.
- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Ps listen to the tape and
chant
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 24
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 94: UNIT 14: ARE THERE ANY POSTERS IN THE ROOM?
Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer
questions about quantity of things, things in the room
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss reading, writing skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils describe their rooms.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Read the chant
4. Read and circle.
T introduces the topic “you are going to read the
sentences and choose the best answer”.
Read the chant
Look at the sentences in
the book
Ss read the sentences individually and check their
prediction. Ss do the task
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
Answers: 1. Are; 2. is; 3. lamps; 4. Chairs; 5. on
5. Read and write
-T explains the situation and how to do the exercise
-Ask students to look at the picture and identify the
things in the room. Read the paragraph in the book and
fill the suitable words to complete the paragraph.
Work individually to do the exercise then report in
front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the
remark.
Correct the pronunciation.
Answer: 1. is 2. chairs 3. T.V 4. pictures
6. Project
- Introduce the situation.
- Explain how to do the exercise: Interview their
friends and complete the table using the structure:
How many … are there? – There are/ There is….
-Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and
give the remark. Correct the pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Read and Work
individually
Work in pairs
Fill the suitable words in
the blanks
Work in group
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 24
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 95: UNIT 15: DO YOU HAVE ANY TOYS?
Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: identify toys.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners: Do you have a doll?-Yes, I do. / - No, I don’t
- Vocabulary: have, teddy bear, doll, car, puzzle, robot
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils describe things in the room.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Read the chant
1. Look, listen and repeat.
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on
page 30 and what they are saying.
Set the scene “you are going to listen to Mai and
Linda identifying toys.
Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.
T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.
Call on one pair. One repeats Mai’s part, the other
repeats Linda’s part.
Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to
reinforce their pronunciation.
2. Point and say
- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 30. Elicit the
characters in the pictures and their names.
Teach vocabulary:
Have teddy bear
Doll car
Puzzle robot
check vocab: what and where
Model sentence: Do you have a doll?
-Yes, I do. / - No, I don’t.
Read the chant
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Look and find out the
model sentences
Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the
characters Mai, Quan and Nam to the pupils. Ask them
to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using
the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and
offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress,
assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary.
- Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front
of the class. The rest of the class observe and give
comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
3. Let’s Talk
Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask
them to identify the characters in the pictures.
Ask Ss work in pairs to identify toys. Call some pairs
to act out
Correct their pronunciation and mistake.
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Point the pictures and
practise
Practise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 96: UNIT 15: DO YOU HAVE ANY TOYS?
Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to identify toys.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss writing, reading and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils write the new words.
3. New lesson:
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm – Identify toys.
4. Listen and number
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 31 of
the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell
pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and
number the pictures they hear. Guess the answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the
boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the
partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T
give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of
the listening text.
5. Read and write
- Have pupils open their books to Page 31. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the pictures and what they are.
Teach vocabulary:
Shelf pretty
- Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information
to write the missing words in paragraph.
- Ss read silently and complete the paragraph.
- Ss trade their answers for correction
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The
others listen and give comments.
Answers: 1. Car 2. Ball 3. Doll 4. Do 5. they
- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the reading text.
Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
6. Let’s write
- Have pupils open their books to Page 31. Get Ss to read
the questions and use the real toys they have to answer.
Pairs work
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Listen and number
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Work individually
Listen and sing
- Tell Ss that they are going to read and answer the
questions about the toys.
- Ss read silently and answer questions.
- Ss trade their answers within pairs for correction
Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others
listen and give comments.
4.Consolidation
Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.
- Retell the content of the lesson.
5. Homework
Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new
words and structures.
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK: 25
Date of preparing: 24/ 8/ 2012
Date of teaching: Monday, August 27th
2012.
Period 97: UNIT 15: DO YOU HAVE ANY TOYS?
Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge:
- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about
toys.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners: Does your brother have a robot? - Yes, he does/ No, he
doesn’t.
- Vocabulary: yo-yo, ship, plane, kite
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Ask Ss to talk about toys
3. New lesson:
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Jumped letters
1. Look, Listen and repeat.
Have Ss to look at the book at page 32.
Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are
saying.
Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases
Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines
in the speech bubbles
Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in
the speech bubbles two times.
Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s
part and the other repeat Linda’s part.
Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat
each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their
pronunciation.
- Teach vocabulary:
yo-yo ship
plane kite
Check vocab: slap the board
- Elicits the structures
Does your brother have a robot?
- Yes, he does/ No, he doesn’t.
2. Point and say
Have Ss look at the pictures on page 32
Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names.
Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
T models/ allocates the parts of characters Mai, Quan
and Nam to Ss
Ask them to act out the dialogue. Repeat the step
with some other pairs for pictures
Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs,
using the pictures.
Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
intonation) when necessary.
Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Read in pairs
Look at 4 pictures
Point to the pictures and
practise
Play role and speak out.
the class. The others observe and give comments.
Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
3 - Let’s talk:
Show picture and give task.
Have Ps work in pair ask and answer question about
toys.
- Display in class, others comment
Listen and correct.
Have Ps practise
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Work in pairs practice
talking:
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 25
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 98: UNIT 15: DO YOU HAVE ANY TOYS?
Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge:
- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about
toys.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils write the new words.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chatting: talk about the toys Ss have.
4. Listen and tick
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 33
of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and tick True or False. Ss guess to tick the p
pictures True or False the boxes.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the
answer with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
5.Read and write
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on
page 33.
Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph
to get the information in order to answer the
questions about Phong’s toys.”
Have a revision of the language
Ask Ss to read the paragraph and do the task
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the paragraph.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
Answers: 1. He has a robot.
2. She has a teddy bear.
3. Yes, he does.
4. She has a yo-yo and a puzzle.
Practise in pairs
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and number
Ps answer
Look at 3 pictures
Work In pair to ask and
answer the questions
5. No, he doesn’t.
6. Let’s sing
- Introduce The Linda has a little doll song, Page 33.
- Play the recording and listen to The song
- Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line
of the rhythm.
- Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do
the actions. The others clap their hands after the song
- Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the
actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them
when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors.
- Call on one group to perform the song at the front of
the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap
the rhythm.
- Have class sing the song again to reinforce their
pronunciation.
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Sing the song
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 25
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 99: UNIT 15: DO YOU HAVE ANY TOYS?
Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: identify toys, and ask
and answer questions about toys. Pronounce the sounds in the letters /pl/, / /
correctly.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils write the new words.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Sing the song Linda has a little doll
1. Listen and repeat
Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant.
Then change the role.
Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in
the words plane and ship
-Introduce the sounds /pl/ and / /
-Have Ps practice the sounds carefully
-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.
-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are
similar to, and then have Ps read words after you
+ Ask some pairs to ask and answer.
+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to
reinforce their pronunciation.
2. Listen and write
- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the
suitable words to fill in the blank.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the
blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with
the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups
for correction.
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
Answer:
3. Let’s chant
- Introduce the Chant.
- Turn on the tape.
- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.
- Ps chant in group and individual.
Sing the song
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Look at 2 sentences
Listen and fill in the blank
Ps listen to the tape and
chant
-The Ps chant and do the action.
- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 25
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 100: UNIT 15: DO YOU HAVE ANY TOYS?
Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: identify toys, ask and
answer questions about the toys.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss reading, writing skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils ask and answer questions about the toys.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Sing the song: Linda has a little doll.
4. Read and complete.
T introduces the topic “you are going to read the
paragraph to get the information in order to fill the
words given to the blanks”. Ss look at the picture and
find out the situation and the toys in the picture
Ss read the sentences individually and check their
prediction. Ss do the task
Sing the song
Look at the picture in the
book
Read and Work
individually
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
Answers: 1. toys; 2. orange; 3. two; 4. ship; 5. green
5. Write about you
- Have pupils open their books to Page 35. Tell pupils
that they are going to read and use the real information
about themselves to write the sentences about their
toys.
- Pupils practice in pairs and complete the sentences.
- Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction.
- Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the
class. The rest of the class listen and give comments.
- Make a few questions to check pupils’
comprehension of the reading text.
- Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
6. Project
- Introduce the situation.
- Explain how to do the exercise: make a paper toy and
ask, answer questions about toys
-Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and
give the remark. Correct the pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Work in pairs
Fill the suitable words in
the blanks
Work in pairs
Pairs work
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 26
Date of preparing:
Date of teaching:
Period 101: REVIEW 3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:
- Perform their abilities in listening, speaking and writing related to the topics from
units 11-15, using the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns they have learnt.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss speaking, listening and writing skills.
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners: Revisions.
- Vocabulary: Revisions.
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
-Ask Ss to write the new words and do exercises in workbook
3. New lesson:
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: - Review the model sentences from unit11
to unit 15
1. Listen and tick
- Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 on page
36 of the Student Book. Give the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the
answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick
the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer
with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
Answers: 1 – c; 2 – d; 3 – b; 4 – a.
2. Listen and number
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 36
of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
Ask ps to practice in pairs
Give the identification
Listen and tick
recording and match the information they hear to the
pictures. They should number the boxes. Guess the
answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the
answer with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
Answer: 1. 2. 3. 4.
3. Read and complete
-T explains the situation and how to do the exercise
-Ask students to read the dialogue in the book and fill
the words given to complete the dialogue. Work in
pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front
of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the
remark.
Correct the pronunciation.
Answer: 1. house 2. bedrooms 3. bathroom
4. small 5. There 5. They
4. Read and match
- Whole class. Have pupils turn their books to page 37.
Tell pupils that they are going to read the sentences to
get the information in order to match the sentences to
the sentences.
- Pupils read the sentences individually and do the
task. Monitor the activity and offer help when
necessary.
- Pair works. Have pupils trade their answers for
correction.
- Call on some pupils to report their answers. The rest
of the class listen give comments.
- Make a few questions to check pupils’
comprehension of the sentences.
- Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to
reinforce their pronunciation.
Answer: 1.c 2. a 3. d 4.b
5. Look and say
Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2, 3 and4 on Page 37.
Work individually
Listen and tick
Work individually
Work in pairs
Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names.
Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the
characters in the pictures to the pupils. Ask them to
ask and answer. Using the pictures in their books.
Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
intonation) when necessary.
- Call on some pairs to perform their task in front of
the class. The rest of the class observe and give
comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Pair works
Do exercises in the
workbook
Date of preparing:
Date of teaching:
Period 102: SHORT STORY
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:
- Review the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns from units 11 - 15.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss speaking, listening, writing and reading skills.
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners: Revisions.
- Vocabulary: Revisions.
- Phonic: Revisions
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Do the exercises. Correct exercise.
3. New lesson:
Warm up: - Review the model sentences from unit
11 to unit 15
1. Read the story. Put these lines in the correct
bubbles. Then listen and check.
- Read the sentences given and read the story about
Cat and Mouse 3
- Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8
on page 38 of the Student Book. Give the
identification of the characters in the pictures and the
characters’ words. Ss read and find out the suitable
sentences to fill in the blanks and explain how to do
the exercise.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and check their answers
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen. Check
their guess.
- Make a few questions to check pupils’
comprehension of the story
- Play the recording again pupils listen to the story and
check Ss’ answers
Answer: 1. Who is Mimi?
2. How many brothers and sisters do you have?
3. Where are they?
4. How many rooms are there in your house?
2. Correct the answer
-Ask students to read the story in the book and read
the sentences given to find out the mistake and correct
the false sentences. Work individually to do the
exercise then practice in pairs in front of the whole
class. The rest listen to and give the remark.
Correct the pronunciation.
Answer: 1. No, he has two sister.
2. No, he has a brother.
3. No, he is Jack.
4. There are eight rooms.
3. Unscramble these words from the conversation
Have Ps work individually. Read the story again and
order the letters to make the meaningful words.
Ask ps to practice in pairs
Read the sentences
Give the identification
Work in pairs
Listen and answer T’s
questions
Work in pairs
Work in group
Pair work
Have pupils trade their answers for correction.
- Call on some pupils to report their answers. The rest
of the class listen give comments.
.
- Have the whole class read each word in chorus to
reinforce their pronunciation.
Answer: a. sister b. brother c. house
d. rooms e. hello f. mouse
4. Complete the conversation between Miu
and Mimi
- Pairs work. Have pupils turn their books to page 39.
Tell pupils that they are going to read the dialogue
between Miu and Mimi and find out the suitable words
to complete the meaningful dialogue.
- Pupils do the task. Monitor the activity and offer help
when necessary.
- Have pupils trade their answers for correction.
- Call on some pairs to report their answers. The rest
of the class listen give comments.
- Make a few questions to check pupils’
comprehension of the sentences.
- Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to
reinforce their pronunciation.
Answer: Miu: Name/is
Mimi: name
Miu: to meet you
Mimi: Nice to meet you
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, review the phonics,
vocabulary and sentence patterns from units 11 - 15.
Read and do exercise in
pairs.
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 26
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 105: UNIT 16: DO YOU HAVE ANY PETS.
Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer
questions about pets.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners: Do you have any pets?–Yes, I do. I have… /No, I don’t. I
have….
- Vocabulary: dog, pet, cute, cat, parrot, rabbit, goldfish
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils answer T’s questions.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chatting
1.Look, listen and repeat.
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on
page 6 and what they are saying.
Set the scene “you are going to listen to Nam, Quan
and Mai ask and answer questions about pets.
Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.
T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.
Call on one pair. One repeats Nam’s part, the others
repeat Mai’s, Quan’s part.
Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to
reinforce their pronunciation.
2. Point and say
- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 40. Elicit the
characters in the pictures and their names.
Teach vocabulary:
Dog pet
Cute cat
Parrot rabbit
goldfish
Check vocab: slap the board
Pair works
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Model sentence: Do you have any pets?
–Yes, I do. I have… /No, I don’t. I have….
Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the
characters the boy and the girl to the pupils. Ask them
to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using
the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and
offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress,
assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary.
- Call on some pairs to perform their task at the fron of
the class. The rest of the class observe and give
comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
3 Let’s Talk
Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask
them to identify the characters in the pictures.
Ask Ss work in pairs to ask and answer questions
about toys. Call some pairs to act out
Correct their pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Look and find out the
model sentences
Point the pictures and
practise
Pactise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 27
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 106: UNIT 16: DO YOU HAVE ANY PETS?
Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer about
pets.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners
- Vocabulary: in the cage, in the fish tank
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils ask and answer about pets.
3. New lesson:
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up
Jumped words
4. Listen and tick
- Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page 41 of the
Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in
the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that
they are going to listen to the recording and tick the
pictures they hear. Guess the answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the
boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the
partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T
give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of
the listening text.
5. Look and write
- Have pupils open their books to Page 41. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the picture and who they are in
the picture.
Teach vocabulary:
In the cage in the fish tank
Pet shop bird
Check vocab: what and where
- Tell Ss that they are going look the picture and read
the paragraph to get information, find out the suitable
words to write in the blanks.
- Ss read silently and complete the dialogues.
- Ss trade their answers for correction
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The
Work individually
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Listen and tick
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Work individually
others listen and give comments.
Answers: 1. Dog 2. cats 3. Birds 5. Goldfish
- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the reading text.
Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
6. Let’s write
- Have pupils open their books to Page 41. Get Ss to write
the answers about the pets they have
- Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction.
- Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class.
The rest of the class listen and give comments and
reinforce their pronunciation.
4.Consolidation
Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.
- Retell the content of the lesson.
5. Homework
Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new
words and structures.
Write the answer
individually
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK: 27
Date of preparing: 24/ 8/ 2012
Date of teaching: Monday, August 27th
2012.
Period 107: UNIT 16: DO YOU HAVE ANY PETS?
Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge:
- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able ask and answer questions about
the location of pets
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners: Where are the cats? – They are under the table.
- Vocabulary: over there, with, in the garden, flower pot, fish tank
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Ask Ss write the new words
3. New lesson:
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chatting about the pets
1. Look, Listen and repeat.
Have Ss to look at the book at page 42.
Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are
saying.
Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases
Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines
in the speech bubbles
Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in
the speech bubbles two times.
Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Nam’s
part and the other repeat his mother’s part.
Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat
each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their
pronunciation.
- Teach vocabulary:
over there with
in the garden flower pot
fish tank
Check vocab: rub out and remember
- Elicits the structures
Where are the cats? – They are under the table.
2. Point and say
Have Ss look at the pictures on page 42
Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names.
Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
T models/ allocates the parts of characters the boy
and the girl to Ss
Ask them to act out the dialogue. Repeat the step
with some other pairs for pictures
Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs,
using the pictures.
Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
Pairs work
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Read in pairs
Look at 4 pictures
Point to the pictures and
practise
Play role and speak out.
intonation) when necessary.
Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of
the class. The others observe and give comments.
Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
3 - Let’s talk:
Show picture and give task. Talk about the location of
pets.
Have Ps work in pair.
- Display in class, others comment
Listen and correct.
Have Ps practise
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Work in pair practice
talking:
Do the exercise in the
wwwwworkbook
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 27
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 108: UNIT 16: DO YOU HAVE ANY TOYS?
Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge:
- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer question about
the location of pets.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary: picture, years old
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils write the new words.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Talk about the location of pets.
4. Listen and number
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 43
of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and number the pictures they hear. They
should guess the answer.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the
answer with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
5.Read and complete
Ask Ss to open the book on page 9.
Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph
to get the information in order to fill the missing
words about the pets and the location of the pets.
Have a revision of the language
Ask Ss to read the paragraph and do the task (match
the sentence with a appropriate picture.)
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
Answers: 1. Pets 2. Cat/on 3. Dog/ under
4. parrots/ rabbit/ garden
Practise in pairs
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and number
Ps answer
Look at 3 pictures
Work Individually
Read the paragraph
6. Let’s sing
- Introduce Do you have any pets song, Page 43.
- Play the recording and listen to the song
- Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line
of the rhythm.
- Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do
the actions. The others clap their hands after the song
- Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the
actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them
when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors.
- Call on one group to perform the song at the front of
the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap
the rhythm.
- Have class sing the song again to reinforce their
pronunciation.
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Sing the song
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 28
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 109: UNIT 16: DO YOU HAVE ANY PETS?
Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer
questions about pets and the location of pets. Pronounce the sounds in the letters
/ /, / / correctly .
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils talk about the location of pets they have.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Sing the song: Do you have any pets?
1. Listen and repeat
Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant.
Then change the role.
Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in
the words dog and parrot
-Introduce the sounds / / and / /
-Have Ps practice the sounds carefully
-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.
-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are
similar to, and then have Ps read words after you
+ Ask some pairs to ask and answer.
+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to
reinforce their pronunciation.
2. Listen and write
- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the
suitable words to fill in the blank.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the
blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with
the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups
for correction.
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
Answer:
3. Let’s chant
- Introduce the Chant.
- Turn on the tape.
- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.
- Ps chant in group and individual.
-The Ps chant and do the action.
- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation
Sing the song
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Look at 2 sentences
Listen and fill in the blank
Ps listen to the tape and
chant
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Do exercises in the
workbook
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 110: UNIT 16: DO YOU HAVE ANY PETS?
Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer
questions about pets and the location of pets.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss reading, writing skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils identify family members, talk about the ages of family members.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Read the chant
4. Read and match.
T introduces the topic “you are going to read the
questions to get the information in order to match the
answers”.
Ss read the sentences individually and check their
prediction. Ss do the task (match the sentence with a
Read the chant
Look at the sentences in
the book
Read and Work
individually
appropriate picture.)
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
Answers: 1 – c; 2 – d; 3 – a; 4 – b.
5. Read and write
-T explains the situation and how to do the exercise
-Ask students to look the picture of Mai’s pets. Ask Ss
to identify the characters in the pictures on page 45.
Read the paragraph and questions in the book and
write the answers.
Work individually to do the exercise then practice in
pairs in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and
give the remark.
Correct the pronunciation.
Answer: 1. She is 8 years old 2. Yes, she does.
3.She has a dog, Two goldfish and two parrots.
4.It’s at the door.
5.They are in the fish tank
6. Project
- Introduce the situation.
- Explain how to do the exercise: draw their pets. Tell
the classmates about it
-Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and
give the remark. Correct the pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Work in pairs
Answer the questions
Work individually
Vb89Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 28
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 111: UNIT 17: WHAT TOYS DO YOU LIKE?
Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer
questions about toys
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners: What toys do you like? - I like ships
- Vocabulary: ship, truck, kite, plane, train
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils greet and introduce their names and their health.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Read the chant
1. Look, listen and repeat.
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on
page 46 and what they are saying.
Set the scene “you are going to listen to Nam and Mai
ask and answer questions about toys.
Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.
T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.
Call on one pair. One repeats Nam’s part, the other
repeats Mai’s part.
Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to
reinforce their pronunciation.
2. Point and say
- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 12. Elicit the
characters in the pictures and their names.
Teach vocabulary:
Ship truck
Kite plane
train
Read the chant
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
check vocab: slap the board
Model sentence: What toys do you like
- I like ships.
Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the
characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to
point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the
pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer
help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation
of sounds, intonation) when necessary.
- Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front
of the class. The rest of the class observe and give
comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
3 Let’s Talk
Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask
them to identify the characters in the pictures.
Ask Ss work in pairs to ask and answer questions
about toys. Call some pairs to act out
Correct their pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Look and find out the
model sentences
Point the pictures and
practise
Pactise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 112: UNIT 17: WHAT TOYS DO YOU LIKE?
Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer
questions about toys.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss writing, reading and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners
- Vocabulary: way, clean, early, in the morning
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils write the new words.
3. New lesson:
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up
Talk about toys
4. Listen and tick
- Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page 47 of the
Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in
the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that
they are going to listen to the recording and tick the
pictures they hear. Guess the answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the
boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the
partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T
give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of
the listening text.
5. Read and write
- Have pupils open their books to Page 47. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the pictures and what they are
saying.
- Tell Ss that they are going to look the pictures, read
and get information to write the missing words in the
sentences.
- Ss read silently and complete the sentences.
- Ss trade their answers for correction
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The
others listen and give comments.
Answers: 1. playroom 2. planes
Ss practise
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Listen and tick
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Work individually
3. dolls 4. ships
5. kites 6. trucks
- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the reading text.
Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
6. Let’s write
- Have pupils open their books to Page 47. Get Ss to write
the answers about the toys they have
- Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction.
- Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class.
The rest of the class listen and give comments and
reinforce their pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.
- Retell the content of the lesson.
5. Homework
Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new
words and structures.
Listen and sing
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK: 29
Date of preparing: 24/ 8/ 2012
Date of teaching: Monday, August 27th
2012.
Period 113: UNIT 17: WHAT TOYS DO YOU HAVE?
Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge:
- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about
quantity.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners: How many parrots do you have?- I have five parrots
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Ask Ss to talk about their toys they have
3. New lesson:
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chatting about toys
1.Look, Listen and repeat
Have Ss to look at the book at page 48.
Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are
saying.
Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrase
Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines
in the speech bubbles
Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in
the speech bubbles two times.
Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s
part and the other repeat Quan’s part.
Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat
each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their
pronunciation.
- Elicits the structures
How many parrots do you have?- I have 5 parrots.
2. Point and say
Have Ss look at the pictures on page 48
Elicit the characters in the pictures and guess what
are they talking about. Ask Ss to guess and complete
the speech bubbles.
T models/ allocates the parts of characters the boys
and the girl to Ss
Ask them to act out the dialogue. Repeat the step
with some other pairs for pictures
Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs,
using the pictures.
Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
intonation) when necessary.
Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of
Pairs work
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Read in pairs
Look at 4 pictures
Point to the pictures and
practise
the class. The others observe and give comments.
Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
3 - Let’s talk:
Show picture and give task.
Have Ps work in pair to talk about quantity
- Display in class, others comment
Listen and correct.
Have Ps practise
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Play role and speak out.
Work in pair practice
talking:
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 29
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period: 114: UNIT 17: WHAT TOYS DO YOU HAVE?
Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge:
- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about
quantity.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary: different
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students’ attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils talk about the toys they have.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: guessing games
4. Listen and number
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 49
of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and match the information they hear to the
pictures. They should number the boxes.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the
answer with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
5.Read and complete
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on
page 49.
Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph
about children’s toys to get the information in order
to fill the suitable words in the blanks.”
Teach vocabulary:
Different
Have a revision of the language
Ask Ss to read the paragraph about children’s toys
and fill the suitable words in the blanks.
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
Answers: 1. Dogs/ parrots; 2. Cats/ dog; 3. goldfish
6. Let’s write
Group works
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and number
Ps answer
Look at 4 pictures
Work Individually
Read the paragraph and do
the exercise
- Have pupils open their books to Page 49. Get Ss to
write the answers about the toys and the quantity of
toys they have
- Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction.
- Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the
class. The rest of the class listen and give comments
and reinforce their pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Practise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 29
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period: 115: UNIT 17: WHAT TOYS DO YOU LIKE?
Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer
questions about toys and quantity. Pronounce the sounds in the letters Kite/ai/,/e/
ship /i/ correctly.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary: behind
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students’ attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils talk about toys.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chain game Group work
1. Listen and repeat
Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant.
Then change the role.
Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in
the words kite and ship
-Introduce the sounds i/ai/ e / /and ship / i /
-Have Ps practice the sounds carefully
-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.
-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are
similar to, and then have Ps read words after you
+ Ask some pairs to ask and answer.
+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to
reinforce their pronunciation.
2. Listen and write
- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the
suitable words to fill in the blank.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the
blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with
the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups
for correction.
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
Answer:
3. Let’s chant
- Introduce the Chant.
- Turn on the tape.
- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.
- Ps chant in group and individual.
-The Ps chant and do the action.
- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Listen and repeat
Look at 2 sentences
Listen and fill in the blank
Ps listen to the tape and
chant
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 29
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 116: UNIT 17: WHAT TOYS DO YOU LIKE?
Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer
questions about toys and quantity.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss reading, writing skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils talk about their house facilities.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Read the chant.
4. Read and match.
T introduces the topic “you are going to read the
paragraph to get the information in order to match the
suitable questions to the answers
Read the questions and answers individually then
matching. Ss do the task
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
Read the chant
Read the paragraph in the
book
Read and Work
individually
Work in pairs
to reinforce their pronunciation
Answers: 1. c; 2. a; 3. d; 4. b.
5. Read and complete
-T explains the situation and how to do the exercise
-Ask students to read the paragraph in the book of
page 51 and answer the questions.
Work individually to find out the suitable words to fill
in the blanks then give the answer in front of the
whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark.
Correct the pronunciation.
Answer: 1. trucks. 2. ten. 3. has.
4. cats. 5. How
6. Project
- Introduce the situation.
- Explain how to do the exercise: Draw and colour the
toys and the pets they have.
-Ss introduce their toys and their pets in front of the
class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct
the pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Read the paragraph and
answer the questions ind
individually
Work individually
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 30
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 117: UNIT 13: WHAT ARE YOU DOING?
Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer
questions about one’s action in progress.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners: What are you doing?- I am reading.
- Vocabulary: doing, reading, cooking, listening to music, cleaning the floor
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils talk about toys they have.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Read the chant
1. Look, listen and repeat.
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on
page 52 and what they are saying.
Set the scene “you are going to listen to Nam and Hoa
ask and answer questions about one’s action in
progress.
Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.
T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.
Call on one pair. One repeats Nam’s part, the other
repeats Hoa’s part.
Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to
reinforce their pronunciation.
2. Point and say
- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 52. Elicit the
characters in the pictures and their names.
Teach vocabulary:
Doing reading
Cooking listening to music
cleaning the floor
Check vocab: what and where
Model sentence: What are you doing? - I am reading.
Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
- Model: Call pairs to practice in front of the whole
class. Practice in pairs. Allocate the parts of the
characters the boy and the girl to the pupils. Ask them
to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using
the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and
offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress,
assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary.
Read the chant
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Look and find out the
model sentences
Point the pictures and
practise
- Call on some groups to perform their task at the front
of the class. The rest of the class observe and give
comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
3 Let’s Talk
Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask
them to identify the characters in the pictures.
Ask Ss work in pair to ask and answer questions about
one’s action in progress. Call some pairs to act out
Correct their pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Pactise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 30
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 118: UNIT 18: WHAT ARE YOU DOING?
Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer
questions about one’s action in progress.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils to write the new words.
3. New lesson:
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up
Ask and answer about one’s action in progress
4. Listen and tick
- Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page 53 of the
Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in
the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that
they are going to listen to the recording and tick the
pictures they hear. Guess the answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the
boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the
partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T
give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of
the listening text.
5. Read and write
- Have pupils open their books to Page 53. Explain the
situation and how to do exercise. Ss are going to read the
paragraph about Mai’s family’s action in progress
- Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information
to write the answers for questions What are they doing?
- Ss read silently and complete the sentences.
- Ss trade their answers within pairs for correction
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The
others listen and give comments.
Answers: 1. reading 2. Is listening to music
3. are cooking
- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the reading text.
Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
6. Let’s write
- Explain how to do the exercise
T introduces the topic “you are going to write the
answers for the questions about your action in progress”
Ss read the sentences individually and do the exercise.
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Pairs work
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Listen and tick
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Work individually
Work in pairs
Listen and sing
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the
sentences.
4.Consolidation
Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.
- Retell the content of the lesson.
5. Homework
Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new
words and structures.
Do exercises in the
Workbook
WEEK: 30
Date of preparing: 24/ 8/ 2012
Date of teaching: Monday, August 27th
2012.
Period 119: UNIT 18: WHAT ARE YOU DOING?
Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge:
- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer question about
someone’s action in progress.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners: What’s he doing? – He’s doing his homework.
- Vocabulary: singing, drawing, playing the piano, watching TV, doing one’s
homework
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Ask Ss to ask and answer questions about one’s action in progress.
3. New lesson:
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: talk about Ss’ (in class) action in progress
1. Look, Listen and repeat.
Have Ss to look at the book at page 54.
Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are
saying.
Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases
Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines
in the speech bubbles
Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in
the speech bubbles two times.
Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Linda’s
part and the other repeat his father’s part.
Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat
each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their
pronunciation.
- Teach vocabulary:
Singing drawing
playing the piano watching TV
doing one’s homework
Check vocab: Rub out and remember
- Elicits the structures
What’s he doing? – He’s doing his homework.
2. Point and say
Have Ss look at the pictures on page 54
Elicit the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss to guess
and complete the speech bubbles.
T models/ allocates the parts of characters the boy
and the girl to Ss use structure:
What’s he doing? – He’s doing his homework.
Ask them to act out the model dialogue. Repeat the
step with some other pairs for pictures
Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue point and
use the information in picture a, b, c and d in pairs.
Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
intonation) when necessary.
Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of
the class. The others observe and give comments.
Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
Individually work
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Read in pairs
Look at 4 pictures
Point to the pictures and
practise
Practice in pairs
Play role and speak out.
to reinforce their pronunciation.
3 - Let’s talk:
Show picture and give task.
Have Ps work in pair to ask and answer questions
about someone’s action in progress.
- Display in class, others comment
Listen and correct.
Have Ps practise
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Work in pair practice
talking:
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 30
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 120: UNIT 18: WHAT ARE YOU DOING?
Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge:
- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about
someone’s action in progress.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss reading, listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary: skating
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils write the new words.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: ask and answer questions about the
someone’s action in progress.
4. Listen and number
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 55
of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and match the information they hear to the
pictures. They should number the boxes.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the
answer with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
5. Read and match
Explain how to do exercise on page 55.
Set the scene: “you are going to read and questions
and match the suitable answer.”
Have a revision of the language:
Ask Ss to read the dialogues and answer. Monitor the
activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some pairs to report their answers. Others
listen and comment.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to
reinforce their pronunciation
Answers: 1. b 2.d 3.a 4.c
6. Let’s sing
- Introduce the I love my parents song, Page 55.
- Play the recording and listen the song
- Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line
of the rhythm.
- Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do
the actions. The others clap their hands after the song
- Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the
actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them
when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors.
- Call on one group to perform the song at the front of
Practise in pairs
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and number
Ps answer
Look at the picture
Work in pairs
Read the questions and
answers in pairs
Sing the song
the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap
the rhythm.
- Have class sing the song again to reinforce their
pronunciation.
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 31
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 121: UNIT 18: WHAT ARE YOU DOING?
Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer
questions about one’s and someone’s action in progress. Pronounce the sounds in
the letters ea/ i: /, aw / / correctly .
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils ask and answer questions about someone’s action in progress.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: sing I love my parents song
1. Listen and repeat
Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant.
Then change the role.
Sing the song
Look at the pictures in the
Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in
the words reading and drawing
-Introduce the sounds ea/ i: / and aw / /
-Have Ps practice the sounds carefully
-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.
-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are
similar to, and then have Ps read words after you
+ Ask some pairs to ask and answer.
+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to
reinforce their pronunciation.
2. Listen and write
- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the
suitable words to fill in the blank.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the
blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with
the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups
for correction.
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
Answer:
3. Let’s chant
- Introduce the Chant.
- Turn on the tape.
- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.
- Ps chant in group and individual.
-The Ps chant and do the action.
- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
book
Listen and repeat
Read 2 sentences
Listen and fill in the blank
Ps listen to the tape and
chant
Do exercises in the
workbook
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 122: UNIT 18: WHAT ARE YOU DOING?
Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer
questions about one’s and someone’s action in progress.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss reading, writing skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils ask and answer questions about someone’s action
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Read the chant.
4. Read and complete.
T explains the situation and how to do the exercise
-Ask students to read the paragraph and choose the
suitable words to fill in the blanks.
Work individually to do the exercise then explain how
to choose the words given to fill in the blanks in front
of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the
remark.
Correct the pronunciation
Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the reading text
Answers: 1. is. 2. In 3. Watching
4. playing 5. listening
5. Let’s write
T introduces the topic “you are going to read the
paragraph about Quan’s family the questions and write
Read the chant
Look at the sentences in
the book
Read and Work
individually
Work individually
Fill the suitable words in
the blanks
the answers”.
Ss read the sentences individually and do the exercise.
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Answer: 1. His family is at home.
2. He is watching TV.
3. She is playing the piano.
4. He is listening to music.
5. He is singing.
6. Project
- Introduce the situation. Ask Ss observe the pictures
and talk about what children are doing.
- Explain how to do the exercise: tell your classmates
what they are doing.
- Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others
listen and comment.
- Correct Ss’ mistakes and pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Work individually
Work individually
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 31
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 123: UNIT 19: THEY ARE IN THE PARK.
Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer
questions about activities in the park.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners: What are they doing? - They are skating.
- Vocabulary: in the park, skating, cycling, skating, flying kites, skipping
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils describe their houses.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: read the chant
1.Look, listen and repeat.
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on
page 58 and what they are saying.
Set the scene “you are going to listen to Nam, Mrs Lan
and Mai ask and answer questions about things in the
room.
Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.
T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.
Call on someone. One repeats Nam’s part, the others
repeat Mai’s part, and Mrs Lan’s part
Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to
reinforce their pronunciation.
2. Point and say
- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 58. Elicit the
characters in the pictures and their names.
Teach vocabulary:
in the park skating
cycling flying kites
skipping
Check vocab: what and where
Model sentence: What are they doing?
- They are skating.
Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the
characters Mai and Linda to the pupils. Ask them to
point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the
pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer
Read the chant
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Look and find out the
model sentences
Point the pictures and
practise
help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation
of sounds, intonation) when necessary.
- Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front
of the class. The rest of the class observe and give
comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
3 Let’s Talk
Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask
them to identify the characters in the pictures.
Ask Ss work in pairs to ask and answer questions
about activities in the park. Call some pairs to act out
Correct their pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Pactise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 31
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 124: UNIT 19: THEY’RE IN THE PARK.
Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer
questions about activities in the park.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss writing, reading and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners
- Vocabulary: sports, games, football, happy, today
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils write the new words.
3. New lesson:
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: ask and answer questions about activities in
the park.
4. Listen and tick
- Have pupils look at pictures 1a, b and 2a, b on page 59
of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell
pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and
tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the
boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the
partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T
give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of
the listening text.
5. Read and write
- Have pupils open their books to Page 59. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the pictures and what they are
doing.
- Teach vocabulary:
Sports games
Football happy
Today
- Check vocabulary: what and where
- Tell Ss that they are going to read the paragraph and
write the missing words to fill in the sentences.
- Ss read silently and complete the sentences.
- Ss trade their answers for correction
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The
others listen and give comments.
Answers: 1. In the park 2. Playing football
3. skipping 4. Is cycling
5. flying kites
- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the reading text.
Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
Practise in pairs
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Listen and tick
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Work individually
Answer the questions
6. Let’s write
- Have pupils open their books to Page 59. Get Ss to read
the questions and use the real information about yourself
to answer them.
- Tell Ss that they are going to read and answer the
questions
- Ss read silently and answer questions.
- Ss trade their answers within pairs for correction
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The
others listen and give comments.
4.Consolidation
Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.
- Retell the content of the lesson.
5. Homework
Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new
words and structures.
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK: 32
Date of preparing: 24/ 8/ 2012
Date of teaching: Monday, August 27th
2012.
Period 125: UNIT 19: THEY’RE IN THE PARK.
Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge:
- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about
the weather in different places.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners: What’s the weather like in Ho Chi Minh city? – It’s sunny.
- Vocabulary: weather, like, great, sunny, rainy, cloudy, windy, snowy, stormy
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Ask Ss to greet to each other
3. New lesson:
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Sing the alphabet song
1.Look, Listen and repeat.
Have Ss to look at the book at page 60.
Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are
saying.
Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases
Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines
in the speech bubbles
Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in
the speech bubbles two times.
Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Linda’s
part and the other repeat Mai’s part.
Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat
each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their
pronunciation.
- Teach vocabulary:
Weather like
Great sunny
Rainy cloudy
Windy snowy
Stormy
Check vocab: slap the board
- Elicits the structures
What’s the weather like in Ho Chi Minh city?
– It’s sunny.
2. Point and say
Have Ss look at the pictures on page 60
Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names.
Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
T models/ allocates the parts of characters the boy
and the girl to Ss
Ask them to act out the dialogue. Repeat the step
with some other pairs for pictures
Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs,
using the pictures.
Sing the song
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Read in pairs
Look at 4 pictures
Point to the pictures and
practise
Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
intonation) when necessary.
Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of
the class. The others observe and give comments.
Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
3 - Let’s talk:
Show picture and give task.
Have Ps work in pair to ask and answer questions
about the weather in different places.
- Display in class, others comment
Listen and correct.
Have Ps practise
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Play role and speak out.
Work in pair practice
talking:
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 31
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 126: UNIT 19: THEY’RE IN THE PARK.
Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge:
- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about
the weather in different places.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils write the new words.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chatting
- T asks Ss to ask and answer questions about the
weather in different places.
4. Listen and number
- Have pupils look at picture on page 61 of the Student
Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the
picture and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they
are going to listen to the recording and number the
things they listen to. They should number the things.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the things. Check their guess. Compare the
answer with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
5. Look, read and write
Ask Ss to read the questions and observe the picture
find out the information to answer the questions.
Set the scene: “you are going to read the question
and observe the pictures in order to answer the
questions”
Have a revision of the language.
Ask Ss to read the paragraph and do the task
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
Practise in pairs
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and number
Ps answer
Look at 3 pictures
Work Individually
Read the question then
answer it using the cues in
the pictures
to reinforce their pronunciation
Answers: 1. cloudy 2. Windy 3. Rainy 4. sunny
6. Let’s sing
- Introduce The weather song, Page 61.
- Play the recording and listen to The song
- Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line
of the rhythm.
- Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do
the actions. The others clap their hands after the song
- Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the
actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them
when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors.
- Call on one group to perform the song at the front of
the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap
the rhythm.
- Have class sing the song again to reinforce their
pronunciation.
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Sing the song
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 32
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 127: UNIT 19: THEY’RE IN THE PARK.
Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer
questions about activities in the park and the weather in different places.
Pronounce the sounds in the letters ai/ /, a-e/ / correctly.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils ask and answer questions about the weather in different places.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Read the chant
1. Listen and repeat
Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant.
Then change the role.
Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in
the words rainy and skate
-Introduce the sounds ai/ / and a-e/ /
-Have Ps practice the sounds carefully
-Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus.
-Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are
similar to, and then have Ps read words after you
+ Ask some pairs to ask and answer.
+ Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to
reinforce their pronunciation.
2. Listen and write
- Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the
suitable words to fill in the blank.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the
blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with
the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups
for correction.
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
Answer:
3. Let’s chant
- Introduce the Chant.
- Turn on the tape.
- Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant.
- Ps chant in group and individual.
Read the chant
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Look at 2 sentences
Listen and fill in the blank
Ps listen to the tape and
chant
- Ps chant and do the action.
- Teacher reinforce their pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 32
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 128: UNIT 19: THEY’RE IN THE PARK.
Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer
questions about activities in the park and the weather in different places.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss reading, writing skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils describe their rooms.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Read the chant
4. Read and match.
T introduces the topic “you are going to read the
questions to match the suitable answers”.
Ss read the sentences individually and check their
prediction. Ss do the task
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Read the chant
Look at the sentences in
the book
Read and Work
individually
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some pairs to report their answers and
explain how to choose the answers. Others listen and
comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the sentences.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
Answers: 1. c; 2. d; 3. b; 4. e; 5. a
5. Read and complete
-T explains the situation and how to do the exercise
-Ask students to read the paragraph in the book and fill
the words given to complete the paragraph.
Work individually to do the exercise then report in
front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the
remark.
Correct the pronunciation.
Answer: 1. weather 2. park 3. flying
4. playing 5. skating
6. Project
- Introduce the situation.
- Explain how to do the exercise: Draw and color a
weather icon for tomorrow’s weather in S’s place.
-Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and
give the remark. Correct the pronunciation
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Work in pairs
Fill the suitable words in
the blanks
Work individually
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 33
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 129: UNIT 20: WHERE’S SA PA?
Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer about
places.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners: Where’s Sa Pa?- It’s in north Vietnam
- Vocabulary: north, south, central, beautiful
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils talk about the weather.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Read the chant
1. Look, listen and repeat.
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on
page 64 and what they are saying.
Set the scene “you are going to listen to Mai and
Linda ask and answer questions about places”.
Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape.
T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times.
Call on one pair. One repeats Mai’s part, the other
repeats Linda’s part.
Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to
reinforce their pronunciation.
2. Point and say
- Have pupils look at pictures on Page 64. Elicit the
characters in the pictures and their names.
Teach vocabulary:
North south
Central beautiful
check vocab: what and where
Model sentence: Where’s Sa Pa?
- It’s in north Vietnam
Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
- Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the
characters Mai and Quan to the pupils. Ask them to
Read the chant
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Look and find out the
model sentences
point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the
pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer
help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation
of sounds, intonation) when necessary.
- Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front
of the class. The rest of the class observe and give
comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation.
3. Let’s Talk
Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask
them to identify the characters in the pictures.
Ask Ss work in pairs ask and answer questions about
places. Call some pairs to act out
Correct their pronunciation and mistake.
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Point the pictures and
practise
Practise in pairs
Do exercises in the
workbook
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 130: UNIT 20: WHERE’S SA PA?
Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer
questions about places.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss writing, reading and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils write the new words.
3. New lesson:
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up – Ask and answer questions about places.
4. Listen and number
- Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2, and 3 on page 65 of the
Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in
the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that
they are going to listen to the recording and number the
pictures they hear. Guess the answer
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the
boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the
partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T
give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of
the listening text.
5. Read and write
- Have pupils open their books to Page 65. Get Ss to
identify the characters in the pictures and what they are.
Teach vocabulary:
city Ha long bay
place town
village bridge
market
- Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information
to write the missing words in sentences.
- Ss read silently and complete the sentences.
- Ss trade their answers for correction
- Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The
others listen and give comments.
Answers: 1. Thang Long bridge/north Vietnam
2. Ben Thanh market/south Vietnam
- Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the reading text.
Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues
chorally to reinforce their pronunciation.
6. Let’s write
Pairs work
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Listen and number
Indentify the characters
in each picture
Work individually
Listen and sing
- Have pupils open their books to Page 65. Get Ss to read
the questions and use the real information about their
places to answer.
- Tell Ss that they are going to read and answer the
questions about their places.
- Ss read silently and answer questions.
- Ss trade their answers within pairs for correction
Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others
listen and give comments.
4.Consolidation
Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again.
- Retell the content of the lesson.
5. Homework
Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new
words and structures.
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK: 33
Date of preparing: 24/ 8/ 2012
Date of teaching: Monday, August 27th
2012.
Period 131: UNIT 20: WHERE’S SA PA?
Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge:
- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about
distance.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners: Is Hai Duong near Ha noi? –Yes, it is/No, It isn’t.
- Vocabulary: near, far from, far, distance
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Ask Ss to talk about toys
3. New lesson:
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Jumped letters
6. Look, Listen and repeat.
Have Ss to look at the book at page 66.
Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are
saying.
Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases
Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines
in the speech bubbles
Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in
the speech bubbles two times.
Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Tony’s
part and the other repeat Linda’s part.
Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat
each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their
pronunciation.
- Teach vocabulary:
Near far from
Far distance
Check vocab: slap the board
- Elicits the structures
Is Hai Duong near Ha noi?
–Yes, it is/No, It isn’t.
2. Point and say
Have Ss look at the pictures on page 66
Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names.
Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles.
T models/ allocates the parts of characters of the
children to Ss
Ask them to act out the dialogue. Repeat the step
with some other pairs for pictures
Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs,
using the pictures.
Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct
pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds,
intonation) when necessary.
Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of
the class. The others observe and give comments.
Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and repeat
Read in pairs
Look at 4 pictures
Point to the pictures and
practise
Play role and speak out.
to reinforce their pronunciation.
3 - Let’s talk:
Show picture and give task.
Have Ps work in pair ask and answer question about
distance.
- Display in class, others comment
Listen and correct.
Have Ps practise
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Work in pairs practice
talking:
Do exercises in the
workbook
WEEK 33
Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th
2014.
Period 132: UNIT 20: WHERE’S SA PA?
Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6
I. Objectives:
1. Knowledge:
- By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about
distance.
2. Skills:
- Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
3. Language focus:
- Sentence Partners:
- Vocabulary:
II. Teaching aids:
1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
III. Teaching processes:
1. Class organization:
- Greeting
- Checking for the students' attendance.
2. Oral test:
- Have pupils write the new words.
3. New lesson
Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
Warm up: Chatting: talk about the distance.
4. Listen and tick
- Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 67
of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the
characters in the pictures and the characters’ words.
Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the
recording and tick True or False. Ss guess to tick the p
pictures True or False the boxes.
- Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and
number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the
answer with the partner.
- Play the recording again pupils check their answers.
T give the answer:
- Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension
of the listening text.
5. Read and complete
Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on
page 67.
Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph
to get the information about Nam’s places in order to
fill the suitable words in the blanks”
Teach vocab:
Theater now
Temple lake
Museum water puppet theater
- Check vocab: Slap the board
Have a revision of the language
Ask Ss to read the paragraph and do the task
Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary
Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction
Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen
and comment.
Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of
the paragraph.
Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus
to reinforce their pronunciation
Practise in pairs
Look at the pictures in the
book
Listen and number
Ps answer
Look at 3 pictures
Work In pair to ask and
answer the questions
Answers: 1. Name 2. Near 3. Theater 4. far
6. Let’s play
- Explain how the game is played: pupils play in pairs.
- When the time is up, call on pairs to demonstrate the
game at the front of the class. The rest of the class
observe and give comments.
- Have the whole class repeat all the sentences to
reinforce their pronunciation.
Follow up:
- Have pupils brainstorm and spell their names of their
classmates / friends.
4.Consolidation
Summary the lesson
5.Homework
- Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new
words
Play game
Do exercises in the
workbook

Lesson Plan - Grade 3

  • 1.
    WEEK: 1 Date ofpreparing: 22/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: ……………/8/2014. Period 1 Unit 1: HELLO Lesson 1(1, 2, 3) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: Greet and self- introduce. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Hello/ hi. I’m + name. - Vocabulary: hello, hi, I, am, nice to meet you. II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Check pupils’ books, note books …… 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up Say hello to the class and introduce yourself, using Hello. I am + name. Walk around the class to say hello again to some pupils and ask them to answer. 1. Look, listen and repeat Ask students to look at the picture in the book and ask: Who are they in the picture? Where are they? Ask students listen and repeat after the tape Repeat again and read in pairs 2. Point and say - Teach vocabulary: Hello Hi Am = ‘m Nice to meet you. Checking: What and where Greeting Look at the picture and answer They are teacher and students They are in the class
  • 2.
    Note: difference betweenHi / Hello. Hi is very informal. Pupils can use with friends but not with an adult, e.g a teacher. Hello is also informal and friendly but more formal than Hi. It can be used with teachers and other adults. Setting the sense: - Have pupils look at pictures. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Who are in the pictures? What are they doing? - Sentence Partners: - Hello - Hi. I’m + name I’m + name (I’m = I am) - Call on a pair and ask them to pretend to be Miss Hien and Nam to act out the greeting exchange. Call on one more pair to act out Mai and Quan to self- introduce. Have the class repeat all the phrases in this section and Teacher correct the Ss pronunciation (stress, assimilation of sounds and intonation) - Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments if possible. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the language. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation 3. Let’s Talk Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pairs to greet and self- introduce. Call some pairs to act out Correct their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Retell the content of the lesson. 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures. Listen and repeat after the teacher Slap the board Work in pairs Work in pairs Do exercises. Learn by heart the new words and structures.
  • 3.
    Date of preparing:22/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching:………………../8/2014. Period 2: UNIT 1: HELLO Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: greet and self- introduce. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Say hello to partner. 4. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 7 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1.b 2.a 5. Let’s write - Have pupils open their books to Page 7. Get Ss to read Greeting Listen and tick
  • 4.
    the text. Tellpupils that they are going to read and get the information to write the missing words in dialogue 1 and 2. - Pupils read individually silently and complete the dialogues. - Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction. - Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class. The rest of the class listen and give comments. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the reading text. Answer: 1. Hello, I’m 2. I’m, Hello. 6. Let’s sing - Introduce the Hello Song, Page 7. - Play the recording and listen the Hello Song - Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of the rhythm. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. The others clap their hands after the song - Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors. - Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm. - Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Retell the content of the lesson. 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures. Work in pairs Listen and sing Do exercises in the workbook
  • 5.
    WEEK: 1 Date ofpreparing: 24/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: ………………./8/ 2014. Period 3: UNIT 1: HELLO Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to greet and respond to greeting 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: How are you? - I’m fine - Vocabulary: bye, goodbye, Thanks, And you? How II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Ask Ss to greet to each other 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting - T asks Ss to repeat the greeting and introducing oneself. 1. Look, Listen and repeat. Have Ss to look at the book at page 8. Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are saying. Set the scene: we are going to review phrases saying hello and bye. Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times. Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s part and the other repeat Nam’ part. Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat Answer the teacher’s questions Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat Read in pairs
  • 6.
    each line inthe speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation. Teach vocabulary: Bye=goodbye How Thanks= thank you And you - Sentence Partners: How are you? - I’m fine 2. Point and say Have Ss look at the pictures on page 8 Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles. T models/ allocates the parts of characters Mai and Nam to Ss Ask them to act out the dialogue1. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures. Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments. Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task. Have Ps work in pair to greet and respond to greeting. - Display in class, others comment Listen and correct. Have Ps do 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Look at 4 pictures Point to the pictures and practise Play role and speak out. Work in pair practice talking: Do exercises in the workbook
  • 7.
    Date of preparing:24/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: ………………./8/ 2014. Period 4: UNIT 1: HELLO Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: Greet and respond to greeting. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting - T asks Ss to repeat the greeting and introducing oneself. 4. Listen and number - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page of the Student Book. Give the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and match the information they hear to the pictures. They should number the boxes. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer the teacher’s questions Look at the pictures in the book Listen and number
  • 8.
    Answer:1.d 2.c 3.b4.a 5. Read and complete -T explains the situation and how to do the exercise -Ask students to read the dialogue 1, 2 in the book and fill the words given to complete the dialogue. Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1.Goodbye 2. Bye 3. Fine 4. thank you 6. Let’s write - Have pupils open their books to Page 9. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what they are saying. Tell pupils that they are going to read and get the information to write the missing words in dialogue. - Pupils read individually silently and complete the dialogues. - Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction. - Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class. The rest of the class listen and give comments. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the reading text. - Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. Answer: 1. How 2. I’m fine, thanks 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Read in pairs Write the suitable words to fill in the blank Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 2 Date of preparing: 31/ 9/ 2014 Date of teaching: ………………/9/ 2014. Period 5: UNIT 1: HELLO Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives:
  • 9.
    1. Knowledge: Bythe end of the lesson Ps will be able to: greet and self- introduce. Greet and respond to greeting and self-introduction. Pronounce the sounds in the letters /h/, /b/ correctly 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting - T asks Ss to repeat the greeting and responding to greeting. 1. Listen and repeat Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role. Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words bye and hello -Introduce the sounds /b/ and /h/ -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully -Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus. -Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer. + Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Listen and write - Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the Ask ps to practice in pairs Listen and repeat Read 2 sentences
  • 10.
    answer with thepartner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction. - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1. Bye 2.hello 3. Let’s chant - Introduce the Chant Hello -Turn on the tape. - Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant. - Ps chant in group and individual. - Ps chant and do the action. -Teacher reinforce their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Listen and fill in the blank Ps listen to the tape and chant Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 2 Date of preparing: 31/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: …………./9/ 2014. Period 6: UNIT 1: HELLO Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: greet and self- introduce, Greet and respond to greeting, and self-introduction. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization:
  • 11.
    - Greeting - Checkingfor the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Read the chant Hello 4. Read and match. T introduces the topic “you are going to read the sentences to get the information in order to match the questions to the answers”. Ss read the sentences individually and check their prediction. Ss do the task (match the sentence with a appropriate picture.) Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1 – d; 2 – a; 3 – b; 4 – c. 5. Read and write - Have pupils open their books to Page 11. Tell pupils that they are going to read and get the information to write the missing words in sentences. - Pupils read individually silently and complete the dialogues. - Pair works. Pupils trade their answers for correction. - Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class. The rest of the class listen and give comments. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the reading text. - Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. Answer: 1. Hello 2. I’m 3. Nice 4. How 5. I’m fine/ Fine 6. Project - Introduce the name card. Read the chant Hello Look at the sentences in the book Read Work individually Work in pairs Write the suitable words to fill in the blank Read 5 sentences Read and write Work individually Work in group
  • 12.
    - Explain howto do the exercise: Make name cards about themselves and others. -Ss Present them to class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 2 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 7: UNIT 2: WHAT’S YOUR NAME? Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about one’s name. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: What’s your name? - My name’s Mai - Vocabulary: what, your, name, my, is=’s, are=’re II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names and their health. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing hello song 1. Look, listen and repeat. Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 12 and what they are saying. Sing the song Look at the pictures in the book
  • 13.
    Set the scene“you are going to listen to Peter and Nam, Linda and Mai greet and introduce their names. Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. Call on one pair. One repeats Peter’s part, the other repeats Nam’s part. Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. And do the same with the dialogue between Linda and Mai 2. Point and say - Have pupils look at pictures on Page 12. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary: What are=’re Your Name My is=’s check vocab: slap the board Model sentence: What’s your name?-My name’s Mai. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 Let’s Talk Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pairs to ask and answer questions about one’s name. Call some pairs to act out Correct their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new Listen and repeat Look and find out the model sentences Point the pictures and practise Pactise in pairs Do exercises in the
  • 14.
    words workbook Date ofpreparing: 02/ 9/ 2014 Date of teaching: ……………………./9/ 2014. Period 8: UNIT 2: WHAT’S YOUR NAME? Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about one’s name. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing, reading and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up Ask and answer questions about one’s name 4. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T Practise in pairs Indentify the characters in each picture Listen and tick
  • 15.
    give the answer: -Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1.a 2. b 5. Look and write - Have pupils open their books to Page 13. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what they are saying. - Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information to write the missing words in dialogue 1 and 2. - Ss read silently and complete the dialogues. - Ss trade their answers within pairs for correction - Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. Answers: 1. My name is / I’m 2. Mai/ my name is/ I’m - Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text. Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 6. Let’s sing - Introduce The alphabet song, Page 13. - Play the recording and listen to The alphabet song - Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of the rhythm. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. The others clap their hands after the song - Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors. - Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm. - Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Retell the content of the lesson. 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new Indentify the characters in each picture Work in pairs Listen and sing Do exercises in the
  • 16.
    words and structures.workbook WEEK: 3 Date of preparing: 5/ 9/ 2014 Date of teaching: ……………/9/2014. Period 9: UNIT 2: WHAT’S YOUR NAME? Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about how to spell one’s name. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: How do you spell your name? –L-I-N-D-A - Vocabulary: How, spell II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization:
  • 17.
    - Greeting - Checkingfor the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Ask Ss to greet to each other 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing the alphabet song 1. Look, Listen and repeat. Have Ss to look at the book at page 14. Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are saying. Set the scene: we are going to review phrases What’s your name? My name’s Mai Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times. Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s part and the other repeat Nam’s part. Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation. - Teach vocabulary: How spell - Elicits the structures How are do you spell your name? –L-I-N-D-A 2. Point and say Have Ss look at the pictures on page 14 Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles. T models/ allocates the parts of characters Linda and Nam to Ss Ask them to act out the dialogue1. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures. Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of Sing the song Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat Read in pairs Look at 4 pictures Point to the pictures and practise
  • 18.
    the class. Theothers observe and give comments. Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task. Have Ps work in pairs to ask and answer questions about how to spell one’s name. - Display in class, others comment Listen and correct. Have Ps practise 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words and structure Play role and speak out. Work in pair practice talking: Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 3 Date of preparing: 5/ 9/ 2014 Date of teaching:……………/9/ 2014. Period 10: UNIT 2: WHAT’S YOUR NAME? Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about how to spell one’s name. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test:
  • 19.
    - Have pupilsgreet and introduce, spell their names. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting - T asks Ss to make question and answer about how to spell one’s name. 4. Listen and number - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 15 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and match the information they hear to the pictures. They should number the boxes. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1.c 2.b 3.d 4.a 5. Read and match Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on page 15. Set the scene: “you are going to read the dialogues to get the information in order to match the pictures to the appropriate dialogues.” Have a revision of the language: “How do you spell your name?” – “L – I – N – D – A.” Ask Ss to read the dialogues and do the task (match the sentence with a appropriate picture.) Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1 – c; 2 – b; 3-a Practise in pairs Look at the pictures in the book Listen and number Ps answer Look at 3 pictures Work Individually Practice the dialogues in pairs
  • 20.
    6. Let’s write -Have pupils open their books to Page 15. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what they are saying. Tell pupils that they are going to read and get the information to write the missing words in dialogue. - Pupils practice in pairs and complete the dialogues. - Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction. - Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class. The rest of the class listen and give comments. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the reading text. - Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Practise in pairs Do exercises in the workbook Date of preparing: 7/ 9/ 2014 Date of teaching: ………………/9/ 2014. Period 11: UNIT 2: WHAT’S YOUR NAME? Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about one’s name, how to spell one’s name, make and respond to instructions. Pronounce the sounds in the letters /m/, /p/ correctly. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization:
  • 21.
    - Greeting - Checkingfor the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting - T asks Ss to make question and answer about how to spell one’s name 1. Listen and repeat Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role. Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words Mai and Peter -Introduce the sounds /m/ and /p/ -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully -Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus. -Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer. + Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Listen and write - Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction. - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1. Peter 2. Mai 3. Let’s chant - Introduce the Chant What’s your name? - Turn on the tape. - Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant. - Ps chant in group and individual. Ask ps to practice in pairs Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat Look at 2 sentences Listen and fill in the blank Ps listen to the tape and chant
  • 22.
    - Ps chantand do the action. - Teacher reinforce their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Do exercises in the workbook Date of preparing: 7/ 9/ 2014 Date of teaching: ………………./9/ 2014. Period 12: UNIT 2: WHAT’S YOUR NAME? Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about one’s name, how to spell one’s name. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce, spell their names. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Read the chant: What’s your name? - T asks Ss to repeat the greeting and responding to greeting. 4. Read and match. T introduces the topic “you are going to read the questions to get the information in order to match the answers”. Ask ps to practice in pairs Look at the sentences in the book
  • 23.
    Ss read thesentences individually and check their prediction. Ss do the task (match the sentence with a appropriate picture.) Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1 – b; 2 – d; 3 – a; 4 – c. 5. Read and complete -T explains the situation and how to do the exercise -Ask students to read the 2 dialogues in the book and fill the words given to complete the dialogue. Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. my 2. Hi 3. How 4. What’s 5. name’s 6. Project - Introduce the situation. - Explain how to do the exercise: Work in groups. Interview their classmates. -Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Read and Work individually Work in pairs Fill the suitable words in the blanks Work in groups Do exercises in the workbook
  • 24.
    WEEK 4 Date ofpreparing: 19/ 9/ 2014 Date of teaching: ………………/9/2014. Period 13: UNIT 3: THIS IS TONY. Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: introduce someone. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: This is Tony - Vocabulary: This II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names and their health. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing the alphabet song 1. Look, listen and repeat. Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 13 and what they are saying. Set the scene “you are going to listen to T introduce someone to class, The class greet the newcomer. Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. Call on one pair. One repeats teacher’s part, the other Sing the alphabet song Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat
  • 25.
    repeats Ss’ part. Havewhole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. And do the same with the dialogue between Linda and Mai 2. Point and say - Have pupils look at pictures on Page 12. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary: This Model sentence: This is Tony. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call someone to practice in front of the whole class. Practice in group. Allocate the parts of the characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some groups to perform their task at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 Let’s Talk Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in groups to introduce someone. Call some groups to act out Correct their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Look and find out the model sentences Point the pictures and practise Pactise in groups Do exercises in the workbook Date of preparing: 19/ 9/ 2014 Date of teaching: ……………….../9/2014. Period 14: UNIT 3: THIS IS TONY.
  • 26.
    Lesson 1: Part4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: introduce someone. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing, reading and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils to ask and answer about the specific information. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up Ask Ps to introduce someone 4. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 19 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1.a 2.b 5. Look and write - Have pupils open their books to Page 19. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what they are saying. - Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information S introduce someone Indentify the characters in each picture Listen and tick Indentify the characters in each picture
  • 27.
    to write themissing words in dialogue 1 and 2. - Ss read silently and complete the dialogues. - Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for correction - Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. Answers: 1. This is / hello, Nam 2.This is/ hello, Phong - Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text. Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 6. Let’s sing - Introduce the How are you? song, Page 19. - Play the recording and listen the How are you? song - Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of the rhythm. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. The others clap their hands after the song - Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct Ss’ errors. - Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm. - Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Retell the content of the lesson. 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures. Work in pairs Listen and sing Do exercises in the Workbook WEEK: 4 Date of preparing: 21/ 9/ 2014 Date of teaching: …………../9/2014.
  • 28.
    Period 15: UNIT3: THIS IS TONY Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer question about someone. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Is that Tony?-Yes, it is/No, it isn’t - Vocabulary: that, yes, no, is not = isn’t, it II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Ask Ss to make and respond to instruction 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing the alphabet song 2. Look, Listen and repeat. Have Ss to look at the book at page 20. Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are saying. Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases Is that Tony? Yes, it is. Is that Quan? No, it’s isn’t. It’s Phong Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times. Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s part and the other repeat Nam’ part. Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation. Do the same with the dialogue between Tom and Sing the song Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat Read in pairs
  • 29.
    Linda 2. Point andsay - Teach vocabulary: That yes No is not = isn’t It Check vocab: what and where - Elicits the structures Is that Tony? - Yes, it is. Is that Quan? - No, it’s isn’t. It’s Phong Have Ss look at the pictures on page 21 Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles. T models/ allocates the parts of characters Mai and Nam to Ss use structure: Is that Tony? - Yes, it is. Is that Quan? - No, it’s isn’t. It’s Phong Ask them to act out the model dialogue. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue point and use the information in picture a, b, c and d to practice in pairs. Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments. Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task. Have Ps work in pairs to ask and answer questions about someone. - Display in class, others comment Listen and correct. Have Ps practise 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new Observe 4 pictures Point to the pictures and practise Practice in pairs Play role and speak out. Work in pair practice talking: Do exercises in the workbook
  • 30.
    words WEEK 4 Date ofpreparing: 21/ 9/ 2014 Date of teaching: …………...../9/ 2014. Period 16: UNIT 3: THIS IS TONY. Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about someone. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer questions about someone. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting - T asks Ss do after T. 4. Listen and number - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and match the information they hear to the pictures. They should number the boxes. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. Practise in pairs Look at the pictures in the book Listen and number
  • 31.
    - Play therecording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1.c 2.b 3.a 4.d 5. Look, read and answer Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures a, b, c, d on page 21. Set the scene: “you are going to read the questions and find out the answer.” Have a revision of the language: “Is that Linda?”– “Yes, it is.” Ask Ss to read the questions and answer (match the sentence with a appropriate picture.) Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: a. Is that Linda? – Yes, it is. b, Is that Peter? – No, it isn’t. It is Tom c, Is that Phong? – Yes, it is. d, Is that Linda? – No, it isn’t. It is Tom. 6. Let’s play - Explain how the game is played: pupils play in groups of six. Each group has one set of four pieces of paper. On each of which one of the four words is written, e.g. this, is, and one of the character’s names that they have learnt (Linda or Tony or Tom or Mary). Each group member pick up one piece of paper. Then the pupils in each group put their pieces of paper together in order to make a sentence, e.g. This is my friend Linda. - Group work. Pupils play the game in groups. Move around to help with the activity. - When the time is up, call on two groups to demonstrate the game at the front of the class. The rest Ps answer Look 4 pictures Work in pairs Read the questions and answers in pairs Practise in groups
  • 32.
    of the classobserve and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the sentences to reinforce their pronunciation. Follow up: - Have pupils brainstorm and spell their names of their classmates / friends. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 5
  • 33.
    Date of preparing:26/9/2014 Date of teaching: ……………../10/2014. Period 17: UNIT 3: THIS IS TONY. Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about someone, introduce someone. Pronounce the sounds in the letters /t/, /j/ correctly . 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting - T asks Ss to introduce someone 1. Listen and repeat Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role. Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words Tony and yes -Introduce the sounds /t/ and /j/ -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully -Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus. -Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer. + Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation. Ask ps to practice in pairs Listen and repeat
  • 34.
    2. Listen andwrite - Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction. - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1. Tony 2. Yes 3. Let’s chant - Introduce the Chant Is that Nam? - Turn on the tape. - Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant. - Ps chant in groups and individual. - Ps chant and do the action. - Teacher reinforce their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Read 2 sentences Listen and fill in the blanks Ps listen to the tape and chant Do exercises in the workbook Date of preparing: 28/ 9/2014 Date of teaching: …………….../10/2014. Period 18: UNIT 3: THIS IS TONY. Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about someone, introduce someone. - Develop Ss reading, writing skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:
  • 35.
    1. Teacher’s: student’sand teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer questions about someone, introduce someone: 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Read the chant Is that Nam? 4. Read and complete. -Ask Ps observe the pictures and identify the people in pictures in book on page 23 T explains the situation and how to do the exercise -Ask students to read the 2 dialogues in the book and fill the words given to complete the dialogue. Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation Answers: 1 – this; 2 – hello; 3 – that; 4 – isn’t. 5. Look, read and write Ask Ps observe the pictures and identify the people in pictures in book on page 23 T introduces the topic “you are going to read the sentences and find the suitable words to fill in the blanks”. Ss read the sentences individually and do the exercise. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answer: 1. Mai 2. Nam 3. Phong 4. Linda 5.Peter 6. Project - Introduce the situation. Read chant Observe the pictures. Read the sentences in the book Read and Work individually Work in pairs Fill the suitable words in the blanks Work individually
  • 36.
    - Explain howto do the exercise: Draw their best friend. Then introduce them to class -Ss draw the picture on the board. - Ps listen and give the comment and correct Ps’ errors 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Work individually Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 5 Date of preparing: 5/ 10/ 2014 Date of teaching: ………………/10/2014. Period 19: UNIT 4: HOW ARE YOU? Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about someone. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Who’s that?- It’s Tony - Vocabulary: who, Mr, Miss, Mrs II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer questions about someone, introduce someone. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing how are you song 1. Look, listen and repeat. Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 24 and what they are saying. Sing the song Look at the pictures in the book
  • 37.
    Set the scene“you are going to listen to hear Mai and Nam, Linda and Nam ask and answer questions introduce someone. Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. Call on four Ps. One repeats Mai’s part, the other repeats Nam’s part. Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. And do the same with the dialogue between Linda and Nam 2. Point and say - Have pupils look at pictures on Page 24. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary: Who Mr Miss Mrs Check vocab: rub out and remember Model sentence: Who’s that?-It’s Tony. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters Quan and Peter to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 Let’s Talk Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pairs to ask and answer questions about someone. Call some pairs to act out Correct their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new Listen and repeat Look and find out the model sentences Point the pictures and practise Pair work Pactise in pairs Do exercises in the
  • 38.
    words workbook Date ofpreparing: 5/ 10/ 2014 Date of teaching: …………………/10/ 2014. Period 20: UNIT 4: HOW OLD ARE YOU? Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about someone. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer questions about someone. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Jumped words 4. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 25 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of Work in pairs Indentify the characters in each picture Listen and tick
  • 39.
    the listening text. Answer:1.b 2.a 5. Read and write - Have pupils open their books to Page 25. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what they are saying. - Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information to write the missing words in dialogue 1 and 2. - Ss read silently and complete the dialogues. - Ss trade their answers within pairs for correction - Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. Answers: 1. Who 2.Who’s that? - Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text. Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 6. Let’s write - Have pupils open their books to Page 25. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures. Tell pupils that they are going to read the question and give the answer using the information in each picture. - Pupils practice in pairs and complete the answer. - Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction. - Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class. The rest of the class listen and give comments. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the reading text. - Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation Answer: 1. It’s Tony 2. It’s Mary 3. It’s Peter 4. It’s Linda 4.Consolidation Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Retell the content of the lesson. 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures. Indentify the characters in each picture Work in pairs Work individually Pair work Do exercises in the workbook
  • 40.
    WEEK: 6 Date ofpreparing: 10/ 10 / 2014 Date of teaching: …………………./10/ 2014. Period 21: UNIT 4: HOW OLD ARE YOU? Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer question about someone’s age. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: How old are you?- I’m eight years old.
  • 41.
    - Vocabulary: one,two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, ten, How old, years old II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Ask Ss to ask and answer questions about someone. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing the alphabet song 1. Look, Listen and repeat. Have Ss to look at the book at page 26. Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are saying. Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times. Divide the class into three groups. One repeat Mai’s part and the others repeat Nam’s part and teacher’s part. Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Point and say Have Ss look at the pictures on page 26 - Teach vocabulary: How old five Year(s) old six One seven Two eight Three nine Four ten - Elicit the structures How old are you? - I’m eight years old. Sing the song Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat Read in pairs Look at 4 pictures
  • 42.
    Elicit the charactersin the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles. T models/ allocates the parts of characters Miss Hien and Tom to Ss Ask them to act out the dialogue1. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures. Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments. Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task. Have Ps work in pairs to ask and answer questions about someone’s age. - Display in class, others comment Listen and correct. Have Ps practise 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Point to the pictures and practise Play role and speak out. Work in pair practice talking: Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 6 Date of preparing: 10/ 10 / 2014 Date of teaching: …………………./10/ 2014. Period 22: UNIT 4: HOW OLD ARE YOU? Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6
  • 43.
    I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: -By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer question about someone’s age. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils count from 1 to 10. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting - T asks Ss to ask and answer questions about someone 4. Listen and write - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and fill the missing information they hear in the blanks. Before listening Ps can guess the answer. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the missing words. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1.six 2.seven 3.eight 4.ten 5. Read and tick Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on Practise in pairs Look at the pictures in the book Listen and fill the missing words Ps answer Look at 4 pictures
  • 44.
    page 27. Set thescene: “you are going to read the dialogues to get the information in order to tick the right picture” Ask Ss to read the dialogues and do the task (match the sentence with a appropriate picture.) Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1 – 6; 2 – 8; 3-10; 4-10 6. Let’s sing - Introduce The Let’s count from one to ten song, Page 27. - Play the recording and listen to The song - Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of the rhythm. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. The others clap their hands after the song - Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors. - Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm. - Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Work Individually Read the dialogues in pairs Practise in pairs Sing the song Do exercises in the workbook
  • 45.
    Date of preparing:12/ 10/ 2014 Date of teaching: ……………../10/ 2014. Period 23: UNIT 4: HOW OLD ARE YOU? Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer question about someone and someone’s age. Pronounce the sounds in the letters /f/, /s/ correctly. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils count from one to ten. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting - T asks Ss to ask and answer question about someone and someone’s age. 1. Listen and repeat Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role. Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words five and six -Introduce the sounds /f/ and /s/ -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully -Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus. -Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you Ask ps to practice in pairs Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat
  • 46.
    + Ask somepairs to ask and answer. + Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Listen and write - Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction. - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1. five 2. Six 3. Let’s chant - Introduce the Chant How are you?. - Turn on the tape. - Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant. - Ps chant in group and individual. - Ps chant and do the action. - Teacher reinforce their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Look at 2 sentences Listen and fill in the blank Ps listen to the tape and chant Do exercises in the workbook Date of preparing: 12/ 10/ 2014 Date of teaching: …………………/10/ 2014. Period 24: UNIT 4: HOW OLD ARE YOU? Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer question about someone and someone’s age. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills
  • 47.
    3. Language focus: -Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer question about someone and someone’s age. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: - T asks Ss to read chant How are you? 4. Read and match. T introduces the topic “you are going to read the questions to get the information in order to match the answers”. Teach vocabulary: Friend Ss read the sentences individually and check their prediction. Ss do the task (match the sentence with a appropriate picture.) Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1 – c; 2 – a; 3 – b. 5.Read and write - Ask Ps to observe and identify the characters in pictures. -T explains the situation and how to do the exercise. -Ask students to read the 2 dialogues in the book and fill the words given to complete the dialogue. Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs Read the chant Look at the sentences in the book Read and Work individually Work in pairs Observe and identify the characters Read then Fill the suitable words in the blanks
  • 48.
    in front ofthe whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. How old/I’m 3. How old/I’m/years old 6. Project - Introduce the situation. - Explain how to do the exercise: Talk to your friends. Write their names and ages -Ss act out in front of the class. The others listen to and give the comment, correct the mistakes 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Work in group Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 7 Date of preparing: 17/10/ 2014 Date of teaching: ……………../10/ 2014. Period 25: UNIT 5: ARE THEY YOUR FRIENDS? Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: introduce one’s friend and respond to the introduction. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: this is my friend Mary. - Vocabulary: friend II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer question about someone and someone’s age. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing Let’s count from one to ten song Sing the song
  • 49.
    1. Look, listenand repeat. Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on page 30 and what they are saying. Set the scene “you are going to listen to Mai, Linda and Mary greet and introduce one’s friend and respond to the introduction. Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. Call on one pair. One repeats Peter’s part, the other repeats Nam’s part. Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. And do the same with the dialogue between Linda and Mai 2. Point and say - Have pupils look at pictures on Page 30. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary: Friend Model sentence: Mai, this is my friend, Mary. – Hello, Mary. Nice to meet you. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some pairs to perform their task at the fron of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 Let’s Talk Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pairs to introduce one’s friend and respond to the introduction. Call some pairs to act out Correct their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat Look and find out the model sentences Point the pictures and practise Pactise in pairs Do exercises in the
  • 50.
    5.Homework - Do exercisesin workbook, learn by heart the new words workbook Date of preparing: 17/10/ 2014 Date of teaching: ………………/10/ 2014. Period 26: UNIT 5: ARE THEY YOUR FRIENDS? Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to introduce one’s friend and respond to introduction. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing, reading and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils introduce one’s friend and respond to instructions 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up : play game bingo 4. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 31 of the Student Book. Give the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T Play game Indentify the characters in each picture Listen and tick
  • 51.
    give the answer: -Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1.b 2.a 5. Read and write - Have pupils open their books to Page 31. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what they are saying. - Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information to write the missing words in dialogue 1 and 2. - Ss read silently and complete the dialogues. - Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for correction - Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. Answers: 1. This is / Hello 2. my friend/ Hello - Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text. Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 6. Let’s sing - Introduce The more we are together, Page 31. - Play the recording and listen The more we are together song - Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of the rhythm. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. The others clap their hands after the song - Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors. - Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm. - Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Retell the content of the lesson. Indentify the characters in each picture Work in pairs Listen and sing
  • 52.
    5. Homework Do exercisesin the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures. Do exercises in the workbook WEEK: 7 Date of preparing: 19/10/2014 Date of teaching: …………………/10/2014. Period 27: UNIT 5: ARE THEY YOUR FRIENDS? Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about friends. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: they, they are=they’re, are not=aren’t - Vocabulary: Are they your friends? –Yes, they are/No, they aren’t II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Ask Ss to introduce one’s friend and respond to introduction. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing the alphabet song 1. Look, Listen and repeat. Have Ss to look at the book at page 32. Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are saying. Set the scene: we are going to learn phrases Are they your friends? –Yes, they are/No, they aren’t Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines Sing the song Look at the pictures in the book
  • 53.
    in the speechbubbles Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times. Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s part and the other repeat Quan’s part. Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation. Do the same with the dialogue in picture b 2. Point and say Have Ss look at the pictures on page 32 - Teach vocabulary: They they are=they’re are not=aren’t - Elicits the structures Are they your friends? –Yes, they are - No, they aren’t Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles. T models/ allocates the parts of characters Linda and Nam to Ss Ask them to act out the dialogue1. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures. Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments. Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task. Have Ps work in pair to ask and answer questions about friends. - Display in class, others comment Listen and correct. Have Ps practise Listen and repeat Read in pairs Look at 4 pictures Point to the pictures and practise Play role and speak out. Work in pair practice talking:
  • 54.
    4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework -Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Do exercises in the workbook WEEK7 Date of preparing: 19/10/ 2014 Date of teaching: ………………../10/ 2014. Period 28: UNIT 5: ARE THEY YOUR FRIENDS? Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about friends. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer questions about friends. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Jumped words 4. Listen and number - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and match the information they hear to the Practise in pairs Look at the pictures in the book
  • 55.
    pictures. They shouldnumber the boxes. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1.d 2.a 3.b 4.c 5. Read and complete Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on page 15. Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph and use the suitable words given to fill in the blanks.” Have a revision of the language Ask Ss to read the paragraph and do the task (match the sentence with a appropriate picture.) Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1 – name; 2 – nine; 3 - and; 4 - friends 6. Write about your friends - Have pupils open their books to Page 33. Ask them to read the text. T explains how to do the exercise. - Ss do the exercise. Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Listen and number Ps answer Look at 3 pictures Work Individually Read the dialogues in pairs Work individually Do exercises in the workbook
  • 56.
    WEEK: 8 Date ofpreparing: 24/10/2014 Date of teaching: ………………….../10/2014. Period 29: UNIT 5: ARE THEY YOUR FRIENDS? Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: introduce one’s friend and respond to the introduction, ask and answer questions about friends. Pronounce the sounds in the letters a / /, e/ / correctly. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting - T asks Ss to make question and answer about how to spell one’s name 1. Listen and repeat Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role. Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words that and yes -Introduce the sounds / / and / / -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully -Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus. -Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer. Ask ps to practice in pairs Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat
  • 57.
    + Have Psrecite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Listen and write - Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction. - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1. that 2. yes 3. Let’s chant - Introduce the Chant Who’s that? - Turn on the tape. - Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant. - Ps chant in group and individual. - Ps chant and do the action. - Teacher reinforce their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Look at 2 sentences Listen and fill in the blank Ps listen to the tape and chant Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 8 Date of preparing: 24/10/ 2014 Date of teaching: ……………../10/ 2014. Period 28: UNIT 5: ARE THEY YOUR FRIENDS? Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to will be able to: introduce one’s friend and respond to the introduction, ask and answer questions about friends. 2. Skills:
  • 58.
    - Develop Ssreading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils will be able to: introduce one’s friend and respond to the introduction, ask and answer questions about friends. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Read the chant Who’s that? 4. Read and match. T introduces the topic “you are going to read the sentences to get the information in order to match the pictures to the text”. - Teach vocab: - Who? - Model sentence: Who is that? – It’s Tony. Who are they? – They’re Peter and Linda. Ss read the sentences individually and check their prediction. Ss do the task (match the sentence with a appropriate picture.) Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1 – c; 2 – d; 3 – b; 4 – a. 5. Circle the correct words -T explains how to do the exercise -Ask students to read the sentences in the book and Read the chant Look at the sentences in the book. Find out new words and model sentence. Read and Work individually Work in pairs Choose the best answer to fill in the blanks
  • 59.
    choose the bestwords given to complete the sentences - do the exercise then report in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. friend 2. they 3. Peter and Mary 4. Yes 5. Aren’t 6. Project - Introduce the situation. - Explain how to do the exercise: present some friends to class -Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Work individually Do exercises in the workbook Date of preparing: 26/10/2014 Date of teaching: …………………/10/2014 Period 31: REVIEW 1 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: - Perform their abilities in listening, speaking and writing related to the topics from units 1-5, using the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns they have learnt. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking, listening and writing skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Revisions. - Vocabulary: Revisions. II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: -Ask Ss to write the new words and do exercises in workbook
  • 60.
    3. New lesson: Teacher’sactions Students’ actions Warm up: - Review the model sentences from unit1 to unit 5 1. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 on page 36 of the Student Book. Give the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answers: 1 – b; 2 – a; 3 – a; 4 – b; 5- b 2. Listen and number - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and match the information they hear to the pictures. They should number the boxes. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1.c 2.b 3.d 4.a 3. Read and complete -T explains the situation and how to do the exercise -Ask students to read the dialogue in the book and fill the words given to complete the dialogue. Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front Ask ps to practice in pairs Give the identification Listen and tick Work individually Listen and tick Work individually
  • 61.
    of the wholeclass. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. Hello 2. name 3. friends 4. nine 4. Read and match - Whole class. Have pupils turn their books to page 37. Tell pupils that they are going to read the sentences to get the information in order to match the sentences to the sentences. - Pupils read the sentences individually and do the task. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary. - Pair works. Have pupils trade their answers for correction. - Call on some pupils to report their answers. The rest of the class listen give comments. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the sentences. - Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. Answer: 1.e 2. d 3. b 4.a 5. c 5. Look and say Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on Page 37. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some pairs to perform their task in front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new Work in pairs Pair works Do exercises in the
  • 62.
    words workbook Date ofpreparing: 26/10/2014 Date of teaching: ……………………../10/2014 Period 32: SHORT STORY I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: - Review the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns from units 1 - 5. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking, listening and reading skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Revisions. - Vocabulary: Revisions. - Phonic: Revisions II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: -Ps ask Ps some questions 3. New lesson: Warm up: - Review the model sentences from unit1 to unit 5 1. Read and Listen to the story This is the first of the four cartoons about Miu and Cat and Chit and Mouse. To help Ps get the idea of the story, simply let them read and listen to this episodes, the initial task will be more challenging. 2. Complete the conversation -Ask students to read the story in the book and fill the suitable words to complete the dialogue. Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ Ask ps to practice in pairs Give the identification Listen and answer T’s questions
  • 63.
    comprehension of thestory Answer: 1. I’m 2. Are you 3. fine 4. Your 5. I’m 6. Meet 7. Do you spell 3. Work in pairs. Have a similar conversation with a partner. Use the names. Have Ps work in pair. Use the guide in part2 but use the real information about themselves - Display in class, others comment Listen and correct. Have Ps practise 4. Match the questions with the answers - Whole class. Have pupils turn their books to page 38. Tell pupils that they are going to read the story to get the information in order to match the questions to the answers. - Pupils read the sentences individually and do the task. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary. - Pair works. Have pupils trade their answers for correction. - Call on some pupils to report their answers. The rest of the class listen give comments. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the sentences. - Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. Answer: 1. c 2. a 3. d 4. b 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, review the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns from units 1 - 5. Work in pairs Work in pairs Work individually Work in pairs Do exercises in the workbook
  • 64.
    WEEK 9 Date ofpreparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 35: UNIT 6: STAND UP! Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: give and respond to instructions. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: be quiet, don’t talk, come here, open your book, close your book, sit down, stand up - Vocabulary: be quiet, boy, sir, sorry, please, class II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils do the exercises. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing hello song 1. Look, listen and repeat. Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 40 and what they are saying. Set the scene “you are going to listen to Mr loc and Ss give and respond to instructions. Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. Call on one pair. One repeats Mr Loc’s part, the other repeats Ss’ part. Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to Sing the song Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat
  • 65.
    reinforce their pronunciation.And do the same with the dialogue between Linda and Mai 2. Point, say and do actions - Have pupils look at pictures on Page 40. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary: Boy Sir Sorry Please class check vocab: slap the board Model sentence: be quiet = don’t talk come here open your book close your book sit down stand up Ask T requests and Ss do. - Model: Call some Ss request and the others do. Allocate the parts of the characters T and Ss do to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 Let’s Talk Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pairs. Call some pairs to act out Correct their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new Look and find out the model sentences Point the pictures and practise Pactise in pairs Do exercises in the
  • 66.
    words workbook Date ofpreparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 36: UNIT 6: STAND UP! Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to make and respond to instructions. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up Play game: Simon says 4. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page 41 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of Play game Indentify the characters in each picture Listen and tick
  • 67.
    the listening text. 5.Look and write - Have pupils open their books to Page 41. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what they are saying. - Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information to write the missing words in dialogue sentences. - Ss read silently and complete the dialogues. - Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for correction - Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. Answers: 1. Open 2. Quiet 3. Close 4. Sit 5. Come 5. Stand - Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text. Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Retell the content of the lesson. 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures. Indentify the characters in each picture Work in pairs Listen and sing Do exercises in the Workbook WEEK: 10 Date of preparing: 24/ 8/ 2012 Date of teaching: Monday, August 27th 2012. Period 37: UNIT 6: STAND UP! Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to Ask for and give permission 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills. 3. Language focus:
  • 68.
    - Sentence Partners:May I come in, Mr Loc? – Yes, you can May I go out, Mr Loc? – No you can’t - Vocabulary: speak, write, May I…, can, can’t II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Ask Ss to make and respond to instructions. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Play game: Simon says 1. Look, listen and repeat - Whole class. Have pupils look at their books (Page 42). Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are saying. Set the scene: we are going to learn phrases May I come in, Mr Loc? – Yes, you can May I go out, Mr Loc? – No you can’t Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times. Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s part and the other repeat Nam’ part. Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation. - Teach vocabulary: Speak Write May I… Can can’t = can not - Elicits the structures May I come in, Mr Loc? – Yes, you can Sing the song Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat Read in pairs Look at 4 pictures
  • 69.
    May I goout, Mr Loc? – No you can’t 2. Point and say Have Ss look at the pictures on page 42 Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles. T models/ allocates the parts of characters Linda and Nam to Ss Ask them to act out the dialogue1. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures a, b, c, d. Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments. Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task. Have Ps work in pair. - Display in class, others comment Listen and correct. Have Ps practice. The rest listen to and give comment. Correct Ss’ error pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Point to the pictures and practise Play role and speak out. Work in pair practice talking: Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 10 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 38: UNIT 6: STAND UP! Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6
  • 70.
    I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: -By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to Ask for and give permission 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils Ask for and give permission. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Order the words 4. Listen and number - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and match the information they hear to the pictures. They should number the boxes. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5.Read and match Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on page 43. Set the scene: “you are going to read the dialogues to get the information in order to match the pictures to the appropriate dialogues.” Work individually Look at the pictures in the book Listen and number Ps answer Look at 3 pictures
  • 71.
    Have a revisionof the language: Ask Ss to read the dialogues and do the task (match the sentence with a appropriate picture.) Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1 – c; 2 – d; 3-a, 4-b 6. Let’s write - Have pupils open their books to Page 43. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what they are saying. Tell pupils that they are going to read and get the information to write the missing words in dialogue. - Pupils practice in pairs and complete the dialogues. - Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction. - Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class. The rest of the class listen and give comments. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the reading text. - Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. Answer: 1. Come in 2. Sit down 3 close my book 4. open my book 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Work Individually Read the dialogues in pairs Practise in pairs Do exercises in the workbook Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 39: UNIT 6: STAND UP! Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3
  • 72.
    I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge:By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: give and respond to instructions, ask for and give permission. Pronounce the sounds in the letters /k/, /d/ correctly. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask for and give permission. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: jumped words 1. Listen and repeat Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role. Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words come and down -Introduce the sounds /k/ and /d/ -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully -Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus. -Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer. + Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Listen and write - Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. Work individually Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat Look at 2 sentences Listen and fill in the blank
  • 73.
    - Play therecording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction. - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 6. Let’s sing - Put the large piece of paper with the Come and sit down, Page 44, written on it on the board. Tell pupils that they are going to sing the Song. - Play the recording all the way through for pupils to listen while they are reading the song. - Play the recording again for pupils to read each line of the rhythm. Have pupils point to the corresponding words while they are repeating. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. Repeat the step, but this time have pupils swap their parts. - Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors. - Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm. - Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Ps listen to the tape and chant Do exercises in the workbook Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 40: UNIT 6: STAND UP!
  • 74.
    Lesson 3: Part4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: give and respond to instructions, ask for and give permission. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils give and respond to instructions, ask for and give permission. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing the Come in and sit down song 4. Read and match. T introduces the topic “you are going to read the sentences to get the information in order to match the pictures to the text”. Ss read the sentences individually and check their prediction. Ss do the task (match the sentence with a appropriate picture.) Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1 – c; 2 – e; 3 – b; 4 – d, 5- a. 6. Read and complete -T explains the situation and how to do the exercise -Ask students to look the pictures and name the Sing the song Look at the sentences in the book Read and Work individually Work in pairs
  • 75.
    characters in eachpicture, find out the situation read the sentences in the book and fill the suitable words to complete the sentences. Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. sit 2. talk 3. Go out/ you can 4. go out/ you can’t 6. Project - Introduce the situation. - Explain how to do the exercise: write and put the instructions in the box. Choose and ask them out -Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Fill the suitable words in the blanks Practice Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 11 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 41: UNIT 7: THAT’S MY SCHOOL Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: talk about school facilities 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: That’s my school. Is it big?-Yes, it is/No, it isn’t. It’s small. - Vocabulary: school, big, small, gym, library, computer room, playground II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance.
  • 76.
    2. Oral test: -Have pupils ask for and give permission, give and respond to instructions. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing Come on and sit down song 1. Look, listen and repeat. Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 46 and what they are saying. Set the scene “you are going to listen to Linda and Mai talk about school facilities. Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. Call on one pair. One repeats Mai’s part, the other repeats Linda’s part. Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Point and say - Have pupils look at pictures on Page 46. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary: School Big Small Gym Library computer room playground check vocab: slap the board Model sentence: That’s my school. Is it big?-Yes, it is/No, it isn’t. It’s small. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call some Ss to talk about school facilities. Ask them to point the pictures and make sentences. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some Ss to perform their task at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus Sing the song Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat Look and find out the model sentences Point the pictures and practise
  • 77.
    to reinforce theirpronunciation. 3 Let’s Talk Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pairs. Call some pairs to act out Correct their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Pactise in pairs Do exercises in the workbook Date of planing : 25.10.2014 Date of teaching: 27.10.2014 Week 11 UNIT 7: THAT’S my school Lesson 1 I.Objectives: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to talk about school facilities - Develop writing, speaking and listening skill. II.Teaching methods: - Communicative method. - Techniques: + Work in pairs + Work in groups, discuss. Ask and answer. III. Teaching aids: - Teacher’s aids: Tape cassette, pictures, poster, word cards. - Students’ aids: book, notebook, workbook. IV. Languages focus:  Vocabulary: classroom, gym, library, computer room, playground. Sentence patterns: That is my school. Is it big?/ small? - Yes, it is/ No, it isn’t. V. Procedures: Time Steps/Activities Work arrangement
  • 78.
    1’ 3’ 5’ 5’ 5’ A.Class organization. Greeting B.New lesson. Warm up: slap the board Pre-teach vocabulary Classroom (n) Gym (n) Library (n) computer room (n) playground(n) * check vocabulary: Match words with pictures 1.Look, listen and repeat. - Have Ss to look at the book at page 46 and identify the question: Who are they?. What are they talking about? -You are going to listen the dialogue - Play the recording all the way through - Play the recording again two times. - Divide the class into groups. - Some pairs to come to the front to read the dialogue - Play the recording again. Model sentence: +That is my school. That is my classroom. + Is it big? No, it isn’t Is it small? Yes, it is Practice 2.Look and say. - Have Ss look at the pictures a, b, c and d on page 46 - T models the dialogue T give picture a & say : That’s the gym. Others say the same. - T- wc - T - Wc - T – WC. Read new words - Ss to listen as they read the dialogue. - Whole class to repeat each line - Ss read in pairs the dialogue - whole class to repeat each line in the text a few times - Ss look at the pictures a, b, c and d on page 46 - Ss repeat - Ss to work in pairs to practice - The others listen & give the coment Go out Come in Sit down Be quiet Stand upDon’t talk
  • 79.
    Date of planing: 25.10.2014 Date of teaching: 28.10.2014 Week 11 UNIT 7: THAT’S my school Lesson 2 I.Objectives: 5’ 5’ 4’ 2’ - Some Ss volumteer come to the class 3. Talk - Ask Ss open their book P.46 and look at the pictures. - Some Ss volumteer come to the class, the other listen and give the comment. 4. Listen and tick - Have Ss look at Pictures 1a, b; 2a, b ; 3a,b on Page 47 - 1st :Play the recording all the way through - 2nd : play the recording for Ss to listen and tick the correct pictures. - 3rd : play the recording for Ss to check their answers. - Ask some questions to ensure Ss’ comprehension of the listening text. 5. Read and write Have Ss look at Pictures a, b and guess what he says. - Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary / correct typical pronunciation errors. - Call on a pair to demonstrate at the front of the class. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases to reinforce their pronunciation Sing: This is the way we go to school C. Homework Practice more about the dialogue and learn them by heart Prepare lesson 2 - Ss to look at the Picture a,b,c,d and answer the question: What is this? - Ss to introduce with: That’s my…… - Identify the characters and guess what they are saying. - Ss to listen while and they are looking the pictures. - Ss to listen and tick the correct pictures. - Ss to check their answers. - Ss trade their answers in pairs for correction - Ss to work in pairs to do the exercise. Answer: That is my classroom That is the library That is the computer room That is the gym Write all into their notebooks
  • 80.
    - Understand howto ask and answer questions about school facilities - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer the quetion about school facilities. - Develop speaking and listening skill. II.Teaching methods: - Communicative method. - Techniques: + Work in pairs + Work in groups, discuss. Ask and answer. III. Teaching aids: - Teacher’s aids: Tape cassette, pictures, poster, word cards. - Students’ aids: book, notebook, workbook. IV. Languages focus:  Vocabulary: gym, computer room, playground, old, new, large Sentence patterns: Is it big?/ small? - Yes, it is/ No, it isn’t. V. Procedures: Time Steps/Activities Work arrangement 1’ 3’ 7’ 4’ 7’ A.Class organization. Greeting B. New lesson. Warm up: Reorder the letter Ygm ………. Csohol…………. Lpyagournd…………. Labriyr……… Who is faster who is a winner a. Pre-teach vocabulary Beautiful new old large Big small Look at * check vocabulary: R. O. R b. present the dialogue *set the scene: Giving introduction of the text : Set the scene: “we are going to learn how to ask about school facilities.” - Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape twice. Is your school big? Yes, it is Is your classroom big? No, it isn’t. It’s small. Listen and repeat - T- wc - T - Wc - T – WC. Read new words - Ss to look at the book at page 48; identify the characters in the picture and what they are speaking. - Ss to listen as they read the dialogue.
  • 81.
    7’ 4’ 2’ - T asksSs to listen and repeat in chorus three times. - Divide the class into two groups. - Let Ss practice the dialogue in pairs - Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation . * Presenting new structure: - T gives a situation to present (using picture) - T elicits the structures by asking Ss to speak out the model sentence: c.Practice: Point and say Have Ss look at the pictures and introduce four characters: T models the dialogue (use a picture) a. school,new/ yes b. gym,big/ yes c. library, old/no d.playground,large/ no - Have Ss to work in pairs - Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary. - Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. - Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of language d. Production: Let’s talk - Have Ss look at the pictures on page 48 and identify the characters in the pictures. T gives some cues: a. classroom/ ( small)/ big b. library/ big c. gym/ (large)/ small d. computer room/new - Monitor the activity, correct typical pronunciation errors. - Call on a pair to demonstrate at the front of the class. C. Homework: Learn all vocabulary, practice more - Whole class to repeat each line - Ss read in group, pair the dialogue Some pairs to read it aloud - whole class to repeat each line in the text a few times Is the …. + adj? Yes,it is/ No, it isn’t - Ss look at the pictures a, b, c and d on page 48 - Ss to repeat the sentences in the bubbles a few times - The class repeat all the phrases - Ss work in pairs to practice - The others listen & give the coment - whole class repeat all the phrases to reinforce their pronunciation. - Ss to look at the Picture a,b,c,d and answer the question: What is this? - Ss talk with: Is the…… - Ss to work in pairs (use the words on the board). - Ss trade their answers in pairs for correction - 6 – 7 pairs. The others listen & give the coment
  • 82.
    Date of planing: 30.10.2014 Date of teaching: 3.11.2014 Week 12 UNIT 7: THAT’S my school Lesson 3 I.Objectives: - By the end of this lesson, students will be able to pronunciate the sound g, l - Review how to ask and answer about school facilities. - Develop speaking, writing skills. II.Teaching methods: - Communicative method. - Techniques: + Work in pairs + Work in groups, discuss. Ask and answer. III. Teaching aids: - Teacher’s aids: Tape cassette, pictures, poster, word cards. - Students’ aids: book, notebook, workbook. IV. Languages focus:  Vocabulary: gym, computer room, playground, old, new, large Sentence patterns: Is it big?/ small? - Yes, it is/ No, it isn’t. Phonics: gym, look. V. Procedures: Time Steps/Activities Work arrangement 1’ 10’ A.Class organization. Greeting B. New lesson. 1. Warm up: Read and Match - T introduces the topic “you are going to read the sentences to get the information in order to match with the respond ”. - Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary 1. Is that your school? 2. Is the library big? - T- wc - T – Wc - Ss read the sentences individually and check their prediction - Ss do the task (match the sentence with a appropriate respond a. No,it isn’t. It’s old. Do exercises in the workbook
  • 83.
    7’ 5’ 10’ 2’ 3. Is themusic room new? 4. This is my school 2. Listen and repeat - Have Ss open the book page 50, look at the words gym/look and notice the letter coloured differently in both words. - Produce the sound of the letter g in the word gym and l in the word look 3. Listen and write - Ask Ss to say what they think about when they hear the sound - Play the recording all the way through for Ss to listen Answer: The school gym is large Look at the library 4. Let’s chant - Play the recording all the way through for Ss to listen while they are reading the chant in their books - Have Ss listen and repeat ( 3 times). - Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary/ correct typical pronunciation errors. - Call on a group to recite the chant. The others clap their hands - Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of language C. Home- link: - Practice more the structure - Do the exercises. Prepare unit 8 b. Wow! It’s very nice c. No, it isn’t. It is small d. Yes, it is - whole class read each sentence in chorus - Ss listen and repeat : The gym is old Look at the school - Ss write the words they hear - Compare with their parners - Ss to listen while they are reading the chant in their books - Whole class to repeat each line - Ss read in group, pair - whole class to repeat each line in the text a few times Date of planing : 30.10.2014 Date of teaching: 4.11.2014 Week 12 UNIT 8: THIS IS MY PEN Lesson 1 I. Objectives: - To identify school things. - By the end of this lesson, students will be able to identify school things
  • 84.
    - Develop speaking,reading skills. II. Teaching method: - Communicative method. - Techniques: + Ask and answer + Work in pairs and individually. Work in groups, discuss. III. Teaching aids: - Teacher’s aids: audio, stickers, puppets, flashcards. - Students’ aids: book, notebook, workbook. IV. Languages focus: a. Vocabulary: pen, rubber, ruler, pencil case, school bag, pencil sharpener, notebook, crayon, coloured pencil, correction pen, ballpoint pen…. b.Sentence patterns: This is my pen. That is my…. V. Procedures: Time Steps/Activities Work arrangement 1’ 3’ 10’ 7’ 5’ A.Class organization. Greeting B. New lesson. 1. Warm up: put the words in order 1. school/ this/ my/ is 2. is/ new/ computer room/ the? C .New lesson. a.vocabulary pen rubber ruler crayon pencil case school bag notebook pencil sharpener coloured pencil correction pen ballpoint pen…. * check vocab: real objects / pictures b. set the scene - Set the scene “you are going to listen to Linda and robot talk about school things. 1. Look, listen and repeat. - Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape twice. - Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. - T elicits model sentences from students Giới thiệu đồ dùng học tập của mình: This/ That is my + tên đồ dùng học tập 2. Look and say - T- wc - T – Wc 3. that/a / gym/ is 4. the library/ large/ is? - T – WC. Read new words - Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 52 and what they are saying. - whole class read each sentence in chorus - Ss listen and repeat : This is my pen That’s my rubber
  • 85.
    8’ 2’ - Ask themto identify the characters in the pictures and what they should say. Fill the bubbles and have Ss to repeat the lines a few times - Ask Ss to practice introducing their school things, using pictures a. pencil b. pencil case c. school bag d. notebook e. pencil sharpener - Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. 3. Talk - Fill in the speech bubbles with the correct phrases promted by Ss S1: This is my rubber S2: Is it? S1: Yes, it is - Have Ss to repeat the sentences a few times before let them practice freely. - Have Ss to work in pairs to practice . - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases to reinforce their pronunciation. C. Home- link: - Learn vocabulary and practice introducing your school things - Prepare lesson 2 - Ss look at the pictures a,b,c,d,e - Whole class to repeat each line - Ss practice in group, pair - The others listen & give the coment - whole class repeat all the phrases to reinforce their pronunciation. - Ss look at the pictures on page 52 and identify the characters in the pictures - Ss to work in pairs (use the words on the board). - Ss trade their answers in pairs for correction - 6 – 7 pairs. The others listen & give the coment Date of planing : 3.11.2014 Date of teaching: 10.11.2014 Week 13 UNIT 8: THIS IS MY PEN Lesson 2 I. Objectives: - To identify school things. - By the end of this lesson, students will be able to talk about school things - Develop speaking, reading skills. II. Teaching method: - Communicative method. - Techniques: + Ask and answer + Work in pairs and individually. Work in groups, discuss. III. Teaching aids:
  • 86.
    - Teacher’s aids:audio, stickers, puppets, flashcards. - Students’ aids: book, notebook, workbook. IV. Languages focus: a. Vocabulary: plural nouns, these, those b.Sentence patterns: These are my books Those are my pencils V. Procedures: Time Steps/Activities Work arrangement 1’ 3’ 10’ 7’ 5’ A.Class organization. Greeting B. New lesson. 1. Warm up: jump words 1. ipecln.............. 2. arcyon................... 3. urrel................ 4. bbrrue................... C .New lesson. a.vocabulary These Those They Plural noun: book  books pencil -> pencils Pencil case -> pencil cases * check vocabulary: Matching b. set the scene - Set the scene “you are going to listen to Mai and robot talk about school things. 1. Look, listen and repeat. - Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape twice. - T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. T elicits model sentences from students These are my books Those are my pencils Giới thiệu đồ dùng học tập của mình : These/ Those are my + plural noun 2. Look and say Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures and what they should say. Fill the bubbles and have Ss to repeat the lines a few times Ask Ss to practice introducing their school - T- wc - T – Wc - T – WC. Read new words - Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 54 and what they are saying. - Ss to listen to the tape twice. - whole class read each sentence in chorus - Ss look at the pictures a,b,c,d,e - Whole class to repeat each line - Ss practice in group, pair
  • 87.
    8’ 2’ things, using pictures a.notebooks b. pens - Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. 3. Talk - Have Ss look at the pictures on page 54 and identify the characters in the pictures. - Fill in the speech bubbles with the correct phrases promted by Ss - Have Ss to repeat the sentences a few times before let them practice freely. - Have Ss to work in pairs to practice . - Call on a pair to demonstrate at the front of the class. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases to reinforce their pronunciation. C. Home- link: Learn vocabulary and practice introducing your school things Prepare lesson 3 c. pencil cases d. rubbers - The others listen & give the coment - whole class repeat all the phrases to reinforce their pronunciation. S1: These are my books S1: Those are my pencils S2: Are they? S2: Are they? S1: Yes, they are S1:Yes,they are - Ss to work in pairs - Ss trade their answers in pairs for correction - 6 – 7 pairs. The others listen & give the coment Date of planing : 3.11.2014 Date of teaching: 11.11.2014 Week 13 UNIT 8: THIS IS MY PEN Lesson 3 I. Objectives: - By the end of this lesson, students will be able to pronunciate the sound r, th - Review how to introdure school things. - Develop listening, writing skills. II. Teaching method: - Communicative method. - Techniques: + Ask and answer + Work in pairs and individually. Work in groups, discuss. III. Teaching aids: - Teacher’s aids: audio, stickers, puppets, flashcards. - Students’ aids: book, notebook, workbook. IV. Languages focus:
  • 88.
    a. Sentence Patterns:Are these your books? - Yes, they are/ No, they aren’t. b. Phonics: ruler, these V. Procedures: Time Steps/Activities Work arrangement 1’ 5’ 10’ 7’ 10’ 2’ A.Class organization. Greeting B. New lesson. 1. Warm up: board racing ( school things) C .New lesson. 1. Listen and repeat - Produce the sound of the letter r in the word ruler and th in the word these - Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape twice. - T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. 2. Listen and write - Ask Ss to say what they think about when they hear the sound - Play the recording all the way through for Ss to listen Answer: These are my ruler Are those your books? - Have the whole class read to reinforce their pronunciation. 3. Let’s chant - Play the recording all the way through for Ss to listen while they are reading the chant in their books - Have Ss circle all the words containing the focused sounds in the chant. - Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary/ correct typical pronunciation errors. - Call on a group to recite the chant. - Have the whole class read to reinforce their pronunciation. C. Home- link: - Practice more the structure - Do the exercises in workbook - T- wc - T – Wc - Ss open the book page 56, look at the words ruler/ these and notice the letter coloured differently in both words. - Ss listen and repeat : Those are rulers These are pens - Ss write the words they hear - Compare with their parners - Ss to listen while they are reading the chant in their books - Ss to listen to the tape twice. - whole class read each sentence in chorus - The others clap their hands
  • 89.
    - Prepare unit9 Date of planing : 15.11.2014 Date of teaching: 18.11.2014 Week 14 UNIT 9: WHAT COLOUR IS IT? Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about school things. - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills - Education: Ss love school subjects II. Language Focus - Sentence Partners: Is this your school bag? – Yes, it is/ No, it isn’t - Vocabulary: III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. IV. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting 2. Oral test: - Have pupils talk about school things. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: read the chant 1. Look, listen and repeat. - Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 58 and what they are saying. - Set the scene “you are going to listen to Mai and Nam ask and answer question about school things. - Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. - Call on one pair. One repeats Mai’s part, the other repeats Nam’s part. - Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. Read the chant - Look at the pictures in the book - Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. - Listen and repeat
  • 90.
    2. Point andsay - Have pupils look at pictures on Page 58. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Model sentence: Is this your school bag? – Yes, it is. Is that your pen? – No, it isn’t. - Model: Call on some Ss. Allocate the parts of the characters Mai, Quan and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some Ss to perform their task in front of the class. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3. Let’s Talk Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Call some pairs to act out Correct their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words - Pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Look and find out the model sentences - Point the pictures and practise -The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Ss work in pairs. - Pactise in pairs Do exercises in the workbook Date of planing : 15.11.2014 Date of teaching: 21.11.2014 Week 14 UNIT 9: WHAT COLOUR IS IT? Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3 I. Objectives: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about colours. - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills.
  • 91.
    - Education: Sslove school subjects and colours II. Language Focus - Sentence Partners: What colour is your box? – It’s red What colour are your pencils? – They’re green. - Vocabulary: colour, red, green, blue, white, yellow, brown, orange III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. IV. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Ask Ss to ask and answer questions about school things 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: talk about school things 1. Look, Listen and repeat. - Have Ss to look at the book at page 60. Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are saying. - Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases - Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times. - Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s part and the other repeat Nam’ part. - Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Point and say Have Ss look at the pictures on page 60 Teach vocabulary: colour white Red yellow Green brown Blue orange - Elicits the structures What colour is your box? – It’s red What colour are your pencils? – They’re green - Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. T models/ allocates the parts of characters Mai and Nam to Ss Practice Look at the pictures in the book - Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles - Listen and repeat - Read in pairs - Look at 4 pictures - Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Repeat the step with some other pairs for
  • 92.
    - Ask themto act out the dialogue1. - Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3. Let’s talk: - Show picture and give task. Have Ps work in pair. - Display in class, others comment - Listen and correct. - Have Ps practise 4. Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words pictures - Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures. - 6-7 pairs. The others observe and give comments. - Point to the pictures and practise - Play role and speak out. - Work in pair practice talking. Do exercises in the workbook Date of planing : 22.11.2014 Date of teaching: 25.11.2014 Week 15 UNIT 9: WHAT COLOUR IS IT? Lesson 3: Part 1- 2-3 I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about school things and colours. - Pronounce the sounds in the letters /m/, /p/ correctly . - Develop Ss writing and listening skills II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting 2. Oral test: - Have pupils write new words. 3. New lesson
  • 93.
    Teacher’s actions Students’actions Warm up: Chatting - T asks Ss to make question and answer about colours 1. Listen and repeat Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role. Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words it and orange -Introduce the sounds /i/ and /o/ -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully -Play the CD -Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Listen and write - Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer. - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 3. Let’s chant - Introduce the Chant. - Turn on the tape. - Teacher reinforce their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Ask ps to practice in pairs Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat - Ps read the chant in chorus - Some pairs to ask and answer. - Look at 2 sentences - Listen and fill in the blank - Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant. - Ps chant in group and individual. -The Ps chant and do the action. - Do exercises in the workbook Date of planing : 22.11.2014 Date of teaching: 28.11.2014 Week 15 UNIT 10: WHAT DO YOU DO AT BREAKTIME? Lesson 1: 1-2-3 I. Objectives:
  • 94.
    - By theend of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about break-time activities. - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills - Education: Ss love subjects II. Language Focus - Sentence Partners: What do you do at break time? – I play badminton. - Vocabulary: do, at break time, play, badminton, football, basketball, chess, table tennis III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. IV. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names and their health. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing My new pen 1. Look, listen and repeat. - Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture a, b on page 64 and what they are saying. - Set the scene “you are going to listen to Mai and Linda and Phong ask and answer questions about break time activities. - Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. - Call on one pair. - Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. And do the same with the dialogue between Linda and Mai 2. Point and say - Have pupils look at pictures on Page 12. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary: Play at break time chess Badminton football do Sing the song Look at the pictures in the book - Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. - One repeats Peter’s part, the other repeats Nam’s part.
  • 95.
    Basketball Table tennis -Check vocab: what and where Model sentence: What do you do at break time? I play football. - Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some pairs to perform their task at the fron of the class. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3. Let’s Talk - Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. - Ask Ss work in pairs. Call some pairs to act out Correct their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Look and find out the model sentences - Pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Point the pictures and practise - The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Identify the characters in the pictures. - Pactise in pairs Do exercises in the workbook Date of planing : 30.11.2014 Date of teaching: 2.12.2014 Week 16 UNIT 10: WHAT DO YOU DO AT BREAK TIME? Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3 I. Objectives: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to express likes and dislikes. - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills. - Education: Ss love subject II. Language Focus - Sentence Partners: Do you like badminton? – Yes, I do./ No, I don’t.
  • 96.
    - Vocabulary: like,let’s, now, skipping, skating, hide-and-seek, blind man’s bluff III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. IV. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Ask Ss to write the new words 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Ask and answer questions about break time activities 1. Look, Listen and repeat. - Have Ss to look at the book at page 66. - Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are saying. - Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases - Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times. - Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s part and the other repeat Linda’ part. Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation. Teach vocabulary: Like let’s Skipping skating Hide-and-seek blind man’s bluff  Elicits the structures Do you like badminton? – Yes, I do. Do you like hide- and- seek? - No, I don’t 2. Point and say - Have Ss look at the pictures on page 66 - Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. - T models/ allocates the parts of characters Mai, Linh and Nam to Ss. - Ask them to act out the dialogue1. Practice in pairs - Look at the pictures in the book - Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles - Listen and repeat Read in pairs - Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures
  • 97.
    - Monitor theactivity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3. Let’s talk: Show picture and give task. Have Ps work in pair. - Display in class. Others comment. - Listen and correct. - Have Ps practise 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words - Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures. - The others observe and give comments. Look at 4 pictures - Point to the pictures and practise - Play role and speak out. - Work in pair practice talking. - Do exercises in the workbook Date of planing : 2.12.2014 Date of teaching: 5.12.2014 Week 16 UNIT 10: WHAT DO YOU DO AT BREAK TIME? Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about break time activities, express likes and dislikes. - Pronounce the sounds in the letters /bl/, /sk/ correctly . - Develop Ss writing and listening skills. II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test:
  • 98.
    - Have pupilsto write new words. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: sing Hide-and-seek song 1. Listen and repeat - Play the CD . - Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words blind and skating -Introduce the sounds /bl/ and /sk/ -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully -Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus. -Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after T + Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Listen and write - Have pupils look at the - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction. 3. Let’s chant - Introduce the Chant. - Turn on the tape. - Teacher reinforce their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words - Sing the song - Look at the pictures in the book - Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role. - Listen and repeat - Look at 2 sentences - Listen and fill in the blank - Compare the answer with the partner. - Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant. - Ps chant in group and individual. -The Ps chant and do the action. Do exercises in the workbook Date of planing : 7.12.2014 Date of teaching: 9.12.2014 Week 17 REVIEW 2 UNITS SIX TO TEN I.Objectives:
  • 99.
    - To reviewthe phonics, the vocabulary and the sentence patterns learnt in units 6 – 10. - Develop speaking, reading and writing skills. - Help Ss to study hardly. II.Teaching methods: - Communicative method. - Techniques: + Work in pairs. + Work in groups, discuss. III.Teaching aids: - Teacher’s aids: books, pictures, poster, word cards. - Students’ aids: book, notebook, workbook. IV.Languages focus: Unit six: Stand up - Giving and responding to instructions - Asking for and giving permission 1. Stand up! 2. May i sit down? Yes, you can/ No, you can’t. Unit 7: That’s my school - naming school rooms - describing school rooms - asking and answering about school rooms. 1. Is this a classroom ? - Yes, it is 2. Is it new ? - Yes, it is. ( no, it isn’t). it’s old Unit 8 : This is my pen - Naming school rooms. - Describing school rooms - Asking and answering about school rooms 1- Is this/ that your school things ? 2. These/ those are + school things ? Unit 9 : what colour is it? - Review asking and answering questions about school things. - Review asking and answering questions about colour. Unit 10 : Our Break Time Naming games and activities Saying the name of games/ activities at break time Asking and answering about games and activities at break time. 1. What do you do at break time ? I play hide – and – seek. I like playing football/ badminton. 2. Do you like playing chess ?
  • 100.
    V. Procedures: Time Steps/ActivitiesWork arrangement 4’ 9’ 9’ 10’ Warm up Let’s Ss chant in two groups. Which is more correct is the winner. 1.New lesson. 1. Phonics - Put the piece of paper with the phonics written on it on the board and play the recording all the way through. - pupils listen to the recording, pointing to the appropriate words on the board. - Draw pupils’ attention to difficult sounds such as which, pens, pencils, break. - Pupils practice saying the focused words in pairs. Monitor the activity. - Correct their pronunciation as necessary. - Call some pair to demonstrate at the front of the class. Have the rest of the class observe and give comment. 2. Vocabulary - Put the vocabulary sheet of the paper on the board. Pupils recall the meaning of the word by reading aloud or playing a game( Pass the word, Crossword puzzle, Slap the board) using flashcards. - Pupils read the words aloud again. Encourage them to group the words into categories: words denoting names, greeting, activities. - Have pupils make sentences with some of words they have learnt. 3. Sentence patterns - Put the sheet of the paper which contains sentence patterns on the board. Play the recording all the way through. Pupils listen to recording as they follow the appropriate line on the board. Replay recording for pupils to repeat each line. - Pupils work in pairs or groups to make dialogues with the appropriate sentence patterns on the board. Then they rehearse their work. - Groups - Whole class Pair work T –whole class Whole class Pair work/ group work Whole class Pair work/ group work
  • 101.
    2’ 1’ - Have somepairs demonstrate their work at the front of the class. 2. Summary: Ss have learnt how to talk about some games. 3. Homework : Review from unit 1 to unit 10 individual Date of planing : 7.12.2014 Date of teaching: 12.12.2014 Week 17 REVIEW 2 I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: - Perform their abilities in listening, speaking and writing related to the topics from units 6-10, using the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns they have learnt. - Develop Ss speaking, listening and writing skills. - Education: Ss love school subjects II. Language Focus - Sentence Partners: Revisions. - Vocabulary: Revisions. III. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. IV. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: -Ask Ss to write the new words and do exercises in workbook 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: - Review the model sentences from unit1 to unit 5 1. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 on page 70 of the Student Book. Give the identification of the characters in the pictures and Ask ps to practice in pairs - Look at pictures 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 on page 70 of the Student Book.
  • 102.
    the characters’ words.Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answers: 1 – c; 2 – d; 3 – b; 4 – a. 2. Listen and number - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and match the information they hear to the pictures. They should number the boxes. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1. 2. 3. 4. 3. Read and complete -T explains the situation and how to do the exercise. -Ask students to read the dialogue in the book and fill the words given to complete the dialogue. - Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. school 2. Playground 3. room 4. Quan 4. Read and match - Whole class. Have pupils turn their books to page 37. Tell pupils that they are going to read the sentences to get the information in order to match the sentences to the sentences. - Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary. - Give the identification - Guess the answer - Listen and tick - Check their answer. Compare the answer with the partner. - Ss look at pictures a, b, c and d on page of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words - Work individually Listen and tick - Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Work individually - Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. - Pupils read the sentences individually and do the task.
  • 103.
    - Have pupilstrade their answers for correction. - Call on some pupils to report their answers. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the sentences. - Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. Answer: 1.e 2. c 3. a 4.c 5. d 5. Look and say - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on Page 71. - Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some pairs to perform their task in front of the class. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words - Work in pairs - The rest of the class listen give comments. - Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names then guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Pair works - 6 -7 pairs. The rest of the class observe and give comments. Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 18 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 70: UNIT 11: THIS IS MY FAMILY. Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: identify family members. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Who’s that?- He’s my father./ She’s my mother. - Vocabulary: man, next to, him, father, mother, young, nice, sister, brother, grandmother, grandfather, he, she
  • 104.
    II. Teaching aids: 1.Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils answer T’s questions. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting 1. Look, listen and repeat. Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 6 and what they are saying. Set the scene “you are going to listen to Linda and Mai identify family members. Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. Call on one pair. One repeats Linda’s part, the other repeats Mai’s part. Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Point and say - Have pupils look at pictures on Page 6. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary: man next to father mother young nice sister brother grandmother grandfather he she check vocab: slap the board Model sentence: Who’s that? - He’s my father./ She’s my mother. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters the boy and the girl to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using Pair works Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat Look and find out the model sentences Point the pictures and
  • 105.
    the pictures intheir books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some pairs to perform their task at the fron of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 Let’s Talk Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pairs. Call some pairs to act out Correct their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words practise Pactise in pairs Do exercises in the workbook Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 71: UNIT 11: THIS IS MY FAMILY. Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to identify family members. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners - Vocabulary: photo, woman, girl, boy, her, family II. Teaching aids:
  • 106.
    1. Teacher’s: student’sand teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up Ask and answer about Ss’ name 4. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page 7 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5. Read and complete - Have pupils open their books to Page 7. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and who they are in the photo. Teach vocabulary: Photo woman Girl boy Her family Happy of Check vocab: what and where - Tell Ss that they are going look the photo and read the sentences to get information to write the missing words. - Ss read silently and complete the dialogues. - Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for correction Greeting Indentify the characters in each picture Listen and tick Indentify the characters in each picture Work individually
  • 107.
    - Ask Ssto read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. Answers: 1. Father 2. Mother 3. brother - Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text. Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 6. Let’s sing - Introduce A happy family song, Page 7. - Play the recording and listen to A happy faamily song - Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of the rhythm. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. The others clap their hands after the song - Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors. - Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm. - Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Retell the content of the lesson. 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures. Listen and sing Do exercises in the workbook WEEK: 18 Date of preparing: 24/ 8/ 2012 Date of teaching: Monday, August 27th 2012. Period 73: UNIT 11: THIS IS MY FAMILY. Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge:
  • 108.
    - By theend of this lesson, Students will be able to talk about the ages of family members. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: How old is your brother? – He is seven. - Vocabulary: eleven, twelve, thirteen, fourteen, fifteen, seventeen, eighteen, nineteen, twenty, thirty, forty, fifty, sixty, seventy, eighty, ninety, one hundred II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Ask Ss to greet to each other 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing A happy family song 1. Look, Listen and repeat. Have Ss to look at the book at page 8. Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are saying. Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times. Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s part and the other repeat Linda’s part. Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation. - Teach vocabulary: Eleven twelve Thirteen fourteen Fifteen seventeen Eighteen nineteen Twenty thirty Sing the song Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat Read in pairs
  • 109.
    Forty fifty Sixty seventy Eightyninety one hundred Check vocab: rub out and remember - Elicits the structures How old is your brother? – He is seven 2. Point and say Have Ss look at the pictures on page 8 Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles. T models/ allocates the parts of characters the boy and the girl to Ss Ask them to act out the dialogue. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures. Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments. Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task. Talk about the age of Nam’s family Have Ps work in pair. - Display in class, others comment Listen and correct. Have Ps practise 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Look at 4 pictures Point to the pictures and practise Play role and speak out. Work in pair practice talking: Do exercises in the workbook
  • 110.
    WEEK 18 Date ofpreparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 74: UNIT 11: THIS IS MY FAMILY. Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to talk about the age of family members. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: picture, years old II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils introduce their family members. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Talk about the age of family members. 4. Listen and number - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and match the information they hear to the pictures. They should number the boxes. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension Practise in pairs Look at the pictures in the book Listen and number
  • 111.
    of the listeningtext. 6. Read and complete Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on page 9. Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph to get the information in order to fill the ages of Quan’s family members Have a revision of the language Ask Ss to read the dialogues and do the task (match the sentence with a appropriate picture.) Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: Quan-10; His father-forty-four; His mother-thirty-nine; His brother-fourteen 6. Write about your family - Have pupils open their books to Page 9. Get Ss to answer the ages of their family members - Pupils practice in pairs and complete the dialogues. - Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction. - Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class. The rest of the class listen and give comments. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the reading text. - Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Ps answer Look at 3 pictures Work Individually Read the paragraph Practise in pairs Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 19 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014
  • 112.
    Date of teaching:Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 75: UNIT 11: THIS IS MY FAMILY. Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: identify family members, talk about the ages of family members. Pronounce the sounds in the letters /br/, /gr/ correctly . 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils to talk about the ages of family members. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting: identify family members, talk about the ages of family members 1. Listen and repeat Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role. Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words brother and grandmother -Introduce the sounds /br/ and /gr/ -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully -Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus. -Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer. + Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Listen and write - Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the Ask ps to practice in pairs Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat Look at 2 sentences
  • 113.
    suitable words tofill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction. - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 3. Let’s chant - Introduce the Chant. - Turn on the tape. - Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant. - Ps chant in group and individual. -The Ps chant and do the action. - Teacher reinforce their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Listen and fill in the blank Ps listen to the tape and chant Do exercises in the workbook Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 76: UNIT 11: THIS IS MY FAMILY. Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: identify family members, talk about the ages of family members. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary:
  • 114.
    II. Teaching aids: 1.Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils identify family members, talk about the ages of family members. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Read the chant 4. Read and match. T introduces the topic “you are going to read the questions to get the information in order to match the answers”. Ss read the sentences individually and check their prediction. Ss do the task (match the sentence with a appropriate picture.) Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1 – d; 2 – a; 3 – b; 4 – c. 5. Read and complete -T explains the situation and how to do the exercise -Ask students to look the photo of Linda’s family Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on page 11. read the paragraph in the book and fill the suitable words to complete the dialogue. Work individually to do the exercise then practice in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. family 2. father 3. mother 4. brother 5. sister Read the chant Look at the sentences in the book Read and Work individually Work in pairs Fill the suitable words in the blanks
  • 115.
    6. Project - Introducethe situation. - Explain how to do the exercise: draw their family. Tell the classmates about it -Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Work individually Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 19 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 77: UNIT 12: THIS IS MY HOUSE. Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able rooms in the house. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: There is a living room. - Vocabulary: house, garden, over there, kitchen, bathroom, bedroom, dining room, garden II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names and their health. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Read the chant 1. Look, listen and repeat. Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on Read the chant Look at the pictures in the
  • 116.
    page 12 andwhat they are saying. Set the scene “you are going to listen to Linda and Mai greet and introduce their names. Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. Call on one pair. One repeats Linda’s part, the other repeats Mai’s part. Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Point and say - Have pupils look at pictures on Page 12. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary: House garden over there kitchen bathroom bedroom dining room garden check vocab: slap the board Model sentence: There is a living room. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some pairs to perform their task at the fron of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 Let’s Talk Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pairs to identify the rooms in Nam’s house. Call some pairs to act out Correct their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework book Listen and repeat Look and find out the model sentences Point the pictures and practise Pactise in pairs
  • 117.
    - Do exercisesin workbook, learn by heart the new words Do exercises in the workbook Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 78: UNIT 12: THIS IS MY HOUSE. Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to indentify rooms in the house. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners - Vocabulary: way, clean, early, in the morning II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up Talk about their houses 4. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page 13 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that Ss practise Indentify the characters in each picture
  • 118.
    they are goingto listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5. Look and write - Have pupils open their books to Page 13. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what they are saying. - Tell Ss that they are going to look the pictures, read and get information to write the missing words in the sentences. - Ss read silently and complete the dialogues. - Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for correction - Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. Answers: 1. A house 2. A living room 3.a kitchen 4. Bedroom 5. a bathroom 6.a kitchen - Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text. Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 6. Let’s sing - Introduce The way I clean my house song, Page 13. - Play the recording and listen to The song - Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of the rhythm. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. The others clap their hands after the song - Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors. - Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the Listen and tick Indentify the characters in each picture Work individually Listen and sing
  • 119.
    rhythm. - Have classsing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Retell the content of the lesson. 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures. Do exercises in the workbook WEEK: 20 Date of preparing: 24/ 8/ 2012 Date of teaching: Monday, August 27th 2012. Period 79: UNIT 12: THIS IS MY HOUSE. Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about house facilities. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Is there a fence?-Yes, there is./ No, there isn’t. - Vocabulary: fence, pond, gate, yard, fence II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Ask Ss to greet to each other 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing the alphabet song Sing the song
  • 120.
    1.Look, Listen andrepeat. Have Ss to look at the book at page 14. Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are saying. Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrase Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times. Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Tony’s part and the other repeat Nam’s part. Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation. - Teach vocabulary: Fence pond Gate yard fence - Elicits the structures Is there a fence?-Yes, there is./ No, there isn’t. 2. Point and say Have Ss look at the pictures on page 14 Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles. T models/ allocates the parts of characters the boys and the girl to Ss Ask them to act out the dialogue1. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures. Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments. Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task. Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat Read in pairs Look at 4 pictures Point to the pictures and practise Play role and speak out.
  • 121.
    Have Ps workin pair to talk about Tony’s house - Display in class, others comment Listen and correct. Have Ps practise 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Work in pair practice talking: Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 20 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 80: UNIT 12: THIS IS MY HOUSE. Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about house facilities. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: There is not a yard - Vocabulary: any, around, but, beautiful, in front of, tree, in II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students’ attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce, spell their names. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing the song Sing the song
  • 122.
    4. Listen andnumber - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 15 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and match the information they hear to the pictures. They should number the boxes. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5.Read and complete Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on page 15. Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph about Phong’s house facilities to get the information in order to fill the given words in the blanks.” Teach vocabulary: Any around But beautiful in front of tree in Check vocab: what and where Model sentence: There is not a yard Have a revision of the language Ask Ss to read the paragraph about Phong’s house facilities and fill the given words in the blanks. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1. House; 2. Beautiful; 3. Tree; 4. Pond 6. Write about your house Look at the pictures in the book Listen and number Ps answer Look at 4 pictures Work Individually Read the paragraph and do the exercise
  • 123.
    - Have pupilsopen their books to Page 15. Get Ss to read the questions and answer about their houses facilities. - Pupils practice in pairs to ask and answer questions about their houses. - Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction. - Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class. The rest of the class listen and give comments. - Ask Ss to talk about their houses. - Have the whole class listen and reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Practise in pairs Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 21 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 81: UNIT 12: THIS IS MY HOUSE. Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to identify rooms in the house, ask and answer questions about house facilities. Pronounce the sounds in the letters ch/ /, th/ / correctly. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: behind II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students’ attendance. 2. Oral test:
  • 124.
    - Have pupilswrite the new words. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: - T asks Ss to make question and answer about houses 1. Listen and repeat Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role. Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words kitchen and bathroom -Introduce the sounds ch/ / and th/ / -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully -Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus. -Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer. + Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Listen and write - Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction. - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 3. Let’s chant - Introduce the Chant. - Turn on the tape. - Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant. - Ps chant in group and individual. -The Ps chant and do the action. - Teacher reinforce their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson Ask ps to practice in pairs Listen and repeat Look at 2 sentences Listen and fill in the blank Ps listen to the tape and chant
  • 125.
    5.Homework - Do exercisesin workbook, learn by heart the new words Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 21 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 82: UNIT 12: THIS IS MY HOUSE. Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: identify rooms in the house, ask and answer questions about house facilities. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils talk about their house facilities. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Read the chant. 4. Read and write. T introduces the topic “you are going to read the paragraph to get the information in order to find the suitable words to fill in the blanks”. Ss look at Mai’s house and find the house facilities read the paragraph individually and check their answers. Ss do the task Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Read the chant Read the paragraph in the book Read and Work individually Work in group
  • 126.
    Have Ss tradethe answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1. house; 2. pond; 3. tree; 4. living. 5. Read again and write the answers -T explains the situation and how to do the exercise -Ask students to read the paragraph in part 4 in the book of page 17 and answer the questions. Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. No, it isn’t. 2. It is blue. 3. Yes, there is. 4. Yes, there is. 5. No, there isn’t 6. Project - Introduce the situation. - Explain how to do the exercise: Draw and colour their houses. Write the names of the rooms in the houses -Ss introduce their houses in front of the class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Read the paragraph and answer the questions in pairs Work individually Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 21 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 83: UNIT 13: WHERE’S MY BOOK? Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives:
  • 127.
    1. Knowledge: Bythe end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Where’s the book?-It’s here/there. - Vocabulary: Where, chair, poster, bed, picture, coat, ball, here, there II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils describe their houses. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Read the chant 1. Look, listen and repeat. Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 18 and what they are saying. Set the scene “you are going to listen to Peter and his mother ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house. Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. Call on one pair. One repeats Peter’s part, the other repeats his mother’s part. Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Point and say - Have pupils look at pictures on Page 12. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary: Where chair Poster bed Picture coat Ball here there Read the chant Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat
  • 128.
    Check vocab: whatand where Model sentence: Where’s the book?-It’s here/there. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call someone to practice in front of the whole class. Practice in group. Allocate the parts of the characters the boy and the girl to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some groups to perform their task at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 Let’s Talk Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pair to ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house.. Call some pairs to act out Correct their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Look and find out the model sentences Point the pictures and practise Pactise in pairs Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 21 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 84: UNIT 13: WHERE’S MY BOOK? Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners
  • 129.
    - Vocabulary: II. Teachingaids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils to ask and answer a bout he specific information. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up Ask and answer about Ss’ name and spell it 4. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page19 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5. Read and complete - Have pupils open their books to Page 19. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what they are saying mention the distance between the hand and the thing in picture. - Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information to write the given words in sentences 1, 2, 3 and 4. - Ss read silently and complete the sentences. - Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for correction - Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. Answers: 1. Here 2. There 3. Here 4. there Greeting Indentify the characters in each picture Listen and tick Indentify the characters in each picture Work individually Work in pairs
  • 130.
    - Make somequestions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text. Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 6. Let’s sing - Introduce the The poster and the ball song, Page 19. - Play the recording and listen the How are you? song - Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of the rhythm. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. The others clap their hands after the song - Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors. - Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm. - Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Retell the contain of the lesson. 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures. Listen and sing Do exercises in the Workbook WEEK: 22 Date of preparing: 24/ 8/ 2012 Date of teaching: Monday, August 27th 2012. Period 85: UNIT 13: WHERE’S MY BOOK? Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer question about the location of things in the house (plural). 2. Skills:
  • 131.
    - Develop Ssspeaking and listening skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Where are the posters? –They are under my bed. - Vocabulary: near, under, on, behind, look in II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Ask Ss to ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing the poster and the ball song 2. Look, Listen and repeat. Have Ss to look at the book at page 20. Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are saying. Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times. Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Peter’s part and the other repeat his mother’s part. Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation. - Teach vocabulary: Near under On behind look in preposition(prep) Check vocab: slap the board - Elicits the structures Where are the posters? –They are under my bed. 2. Point and say Have Ss look at the pictures on page 20 Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Sing the song Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat Read in pairs Look at 4 pictures
  • 132.
    Ask Ss toguess and complete the speech bubbles. T models/ allocates the parts of characters Quan and Linda to Ss use structure: Where are the posters? –They are under my bed. Ask them to act out the model dialogue. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue point and use the information in picture a, b, c and d in pairs. Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments. Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task. Have Ps work in pair to ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house. - Display in class, others comment Listen and correct. Have Ps practise 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Point to the pictures and practise Practice in pairs Play role and speak out. Work in pair practice talking: Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 22 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 86: UNIT 3: WHERE’S MY BOOK? Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house (plural) 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, listening skills
  • 133.
    3. Language focus: -Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: bed, ball II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house 4. Listen and number - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 21 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and match the information they hear to the pictures. They should number the boxes. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5. Read and complete Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on page 21. Set the scene: “you are going to read and questions the paragraph about phong’s room and find out the answer.” Have a revision of the language: Ask Ss to read the dialogues and answer. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Practise in pairs Look at the pictures in the book Listen and number Ps answer Look at the picture Work In pairs
  • 134.
    Call on someSs to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1. It is on the bed. 2, They are under the bed 3, They are near the desk. 4, They are on the desk. 5, They are on the wall 6. Write about your bedroom - Explain how to do the exercise T introduces the topic “you are going to write the paragraph about their houses” Ss read the sentences individually and do the exercise. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Read the dialogues in pairs Work individually Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 22 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 87 UNIT 13: WHERE’S MY BOOK? Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house. Pronounce the sounds in the letters / /, / / correctly . 2. Skills:
  • 135.
    - Develop Sswriting and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house 1. Listen and repeat Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role. Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words chair and where -Introduce the sounds / / and / / -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully -Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus. -Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer. + Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Listen and write - Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction. Ask ps to practice in pairs Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat Look at 2 sentences Listen and fill in the blank
  • 136.
    - Ask somequestions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 3. Let’s chant - Introduce the Chant. - Turn on the tape. - Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant. - Ps chant in group and individual. -The Ps chant and do the action. - Teacher reinforce their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Ps listen to the tape and chant Do exercises in the workbook Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 88: UNIT 13: WHERE’S MY BOOK? Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about the location of things in the house 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test:
  • 137.
    - Have pupilsask and answer questions about the location of things in the house 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: read chant. 4. Read and tick. T explains the situation and how to do the exercise -Ask students to read the paragraph and choose the suitable picture. Work in groups to do the exercise then explain how to choose the picture in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the reading text Answers: picture c. 5.Read and write T introduces the topic “you are going to read the sentences and find the suitable words to fill in the blanks”. Ss read the sentences individually and do the exercise. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. 6. Project - Introduce the situation. - Explain how to do the exercise: draw your bedroom and describe it to your classmates - Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. - Correct Ss’ mistakes and pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Read chant Look at the sentences in the book Read and Work individually Work individually Fill the suitable words in the blanks Work individually Work individually Do exercises in the workbook
  • 138.
    WEEK 23 Date ofpreparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 89: UNIT 14: ARE THERE ANY POSTERS IN THE ROOM? Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about things in the room. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Are there any posters in the room? - Yes, there are/ No, there aren’t - Vocabulary: any, map, sofa, wardrobe, cupboard II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils describe their houses. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: read the chant 1. Look, listen and repeat. Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 24 and what they are saying. Set the scene “you are going to listen to Linda and Mai ask and answer questions about things in the room. Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. Call on one pair. One repeats Linda’s part, the other repeats Mai’s part. Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Point and say - Have pupils look at pictures on Page 24. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Read the chant Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat
  • 139.
    Teach vocabulary: Any map Sofawardrobe cupboard Check vocab: what and where Model sentence: Are there any posters in the room? - Yes, there are/ No, there aren’t Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 Let’s Talk Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pairs to ask and answer questions about things in the room. Call some pairs to act out Correct their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Look and find out the model sentences Point the pictures and practise Pactise in pairs Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 23 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 90: UNIT 14: ARE THERE ANY POSTERS IN THE ROOM? Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about things in the room. 2. Skills:
  • 140.
    - Develop Sswriting and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: ask and answer questions about things in the room. 4. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures 1 and 2 on page 25 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5. Look, read and write - Have pupils open their books to Page 25. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what are there in the picture. - Tell Ss that they are going to read the sentences and write the missing words to fill in the blanks. - Ss read silently and complete the sentences. - Ss trade their answers within pairs or groups for correction - Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The Practise in pairs Indentify the characters in each picture Listen and tick Indentify the characters in each picture Work in pairs
  • 141.
    others listen andgive comments. Answers: 2. Cupboard 3. Map 4. chairs - Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text. Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 6. Let’s write - Have pupils open their books to Page 25. Get Ss to read the questions and use the real things in their houses to answer them. - Tell Ss that they are going to read and answer the questions - Ss read silently and answer questions. - Ss trade their answers within pairs for correction - Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. 4.Consolidation Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Retell the content of the lesson. 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures. Answer the questions Do exercises in the workbook WEEK: 23 Date of preparing: 24/ 8/ 2012 Date of teaching: Monday, August 27th 2012. Period 91: UNIT 14: ARE THERE ANY POSTERS IN THE ROOM? Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about quantity of things. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: How many chairs are there? - There are six. - Vocabulary: How many, cup, fan, mirror, door, window, count
  • 142.
    II. Teaching aids: 1.Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Ask Ss to greet to each other 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing the alphabet song 1.Look, Listen and repeat. Have Ss to look at the book at page 26. Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are saying. Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times. Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Peter’s part and the other repeat Nam’s part. Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation. - Teach vocabulary: How many cup Fan mirror Door window count - Elicits the structures How many chairs are there? - There are six 2. Point and say Have Ss look at the pictures on page 26 Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles. T models/ allocates the parts of characters the boy and the girl to Ss Ask them to act out the dialogue. Repeat the step Sing the song Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat Read in pairs Look at 4 pictures
  • 143.
    with some otherpairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures. Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments. Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task. Have Ps work in pair to ask and answer questions about quantity of things. - Display in class, others comment Listen and correct. Have Ps practise 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Point to the pictures and practise Play role and speak out. Work in pair practice talking: Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 23 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 92: UNIT 14: ARE THERE ANY POSTERS IN THE ROOM? Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about quantity of things. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners:
  • 144.
    - Vocabulary: II. Teachingaids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting - T asks Ss to ask and answer questions about quantity of things. 4. Listen and number - Have pupils look at picture on page 27 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the picture and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and number the things they listen to. They should number the things. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the things. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5.Read and write Ask Ss to read the paragraph and find out the information to answer the questions. Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph to get the information in order to answer the questions” Have a revision of the language. Ask Ss to read the paragraph and do the task Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Practise in pairs Look at the pictures in the book Listen and number Ps answer Look at 3 pictures Work Individually Read the paragraph, ask and answer questions in pairs
  • 145.
    Make a fewquestions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1. There is one door. 2. There are two windows. 3. There are eight chairs. 4. There are four pictures. 5. There are two fans. 6. Let’s play - Introduce the game Spot the difference to pupils. - Explain how the game is played. Pupils find out the difference things in the pictures - Pupils play the game then report in front of the class. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary. - When the time is up, call on some Ss to demonstrate the game at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Correct the mistake and pronunciation if necessary. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Work individually Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 24 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 93: UNIT 14: ARE THERE ANY POSTERS IN THE ROOM? Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about quantity of things, things in the room. Pronounce the sounds in the letters / /, / / correctly. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids:
  • 146.
    1. Teacher’s: student’sand teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer questions about quantity of things. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting - T asks Ss to describe their rooms 1. Listen and repeat Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role. Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words fan and cup -Introduce the sounds / / and / / -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully -Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus. -Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer. + Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Listen and write - Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction. - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 3. Let’s chant - Introduce the Chant. Ask ps to practice Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat Look at 2 sentences Listen and fill in the blank
  • 147.
    - Turn onthe tape. - Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant. - Ps chant in group and individual. - Ps chant and do the action. - Teacher reinforce their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Ps listen to the tape and chant Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 24 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 94: UNIT 14: ARE THERE ANY POSTERS IN THE ROOM? Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about quantity of things, things in the room 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils describe their rooms. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Read the chant 4. Read and circle. T introduces the topic “you are going to read the sentences and choose the best answer”. Read the chant Look at the sentences in the book
  • 148.
    Ss read thesentences individually and check their prediction. Ss do the task Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1. Are; 2. is; 3. lamps; 4. Chairs; 5. on 5. Read and write -T explains the situation and how to do the exercise -Ask students to look at the picture and identify the things in the room. Read the paragraph in the book and fill the suitable words to complete the paragraph. Work individually to do the exercise then report in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. is 2. chairs 3. T.V 4. pictures 6. Project - Introduce the situation. - Explain how to do the exercise: Interview their friends and complete the table using the structure: How many … are there? – There are/ There is…. -Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Read and Work individually Work in pairs Fill the suitable words in the blanks Work in group Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 24 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 95: UNIT 15: DO YOU HAVE ANY TOYS? Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3
  • 149.
    I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge:By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: identify toys. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Do you have a doll?-Yes, I do. / - No, I don’t - Vocabulary: have, teddy bear, doll, car, puzzle, robot II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils describe things in the room. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Read the chant 1. Look, listen and repeat. Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 30 and what they are saying. Set the scene “you are going to listen to Mai and Linda identifying toys. Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. Call on one pair. One repeats Mai’s part, the other repeats Linda’s part. Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Point and say - Have pupils look at pictures on Page 30. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary: Have teddy bear Doll car Puzzle robot check vocab: what and where Model sentence: Do you have a doll? -Yes, I do. / - No, I don’t. Read the chant Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat Look and find out the model sentences
  • 150.
    Ask pupils toguess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters Mai, Quan and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3. Let’s Talk Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pairs to identify toys. Call some pairs to act out Correct their pronunciation and mistake. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Point the pictures and practise Practise in pairs Do exercises in the workbook Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 96: UNIT 15: DO YOU HAVE ANY TOYS? Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to identify toys. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing, reading and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes:
  • 151.
    1. Class organization: -Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm – Identify toys. 4. Listen and number - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 31 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and number the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5. Read and write - Have pupils open their books to Page 31. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what they are. Teach vocabulary: Shelf pretty - Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information to write the missing words in paragraph. - Ss read silently and complete the paragraph. - Ss trade their answers for correction - Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. Answers: 1. Car 2. Ball 3. Doll 4. Do 5. they - Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text. Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 6. Let’s write - Have pupils open their books to Page 31. Get Ss to read the questions and use the real toys they have to answer. Pairs work Indentify the characters in each picture Listen and number Indentify the characters in each picture Work individually Listen and sing
  • 152.
    - Tell Ssthat they are going to read and answer the questions about the toys. - Ss read silently and answer questions. - Ss trade their answers within pairs for correction Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. 4.Consolidation Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Retell the content of the lesson. 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures. Do exercises in the workbook WEEK: 25 Date of preparing: 24/ 8/ 2012 Date of teaching: Monday, August 27th 2012. Period 97: UNIT 15: DO YOU HAVE ANY TOYS? Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about toys. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Does your brother have a robot? - Yes, he does/ No, he doesn’t. - Vocabulary: yo-yo, ship, plane, kite II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance.
  • 153.
    2. Oral test: -Ask Ss to talk about toys 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Jumped letters 1. Look, Listen and repeat. Have Ss to look at the book at page 32. Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are saying. Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times. Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s part and the other repeat Linda’s part. Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation. - Teach vocabulary: yo-yo ship plane kite Check vocab: slap the board - Elicits the structures Does your brother have a robot? - Yes, he does/ No, he doesn’t. 2. Point and say Have Ss look at the pictures on page 32 Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles. T models/ allocates the parts of characters Mai, Quan and Nam to Ss Ask them to act out the dialogue. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures. Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat Read in pairs Look at 4 pictures Point to the pictures and practise Play role and speak out.
  • 154.
    the class. Theothers observe and give comments. Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task. Have Ps work in pair ask and answer question about toys. - Display in class, others comment Listen and correct. Have Ps practise 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Work in pairs practice talking: Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 25 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 98: UNIT 15: DO YOU HAVE ANY TOYS? Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about toys. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting
  • 155.
    - Checking forthe students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting: talk about the toys Ss have. 4. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 33 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick True or False. Ss guess to tick the p pictures True or False the boxes. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5.Read and write Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 33. Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph to get the information in order to answer the questions about Phong’s toys.” Have a revision of the language Ask Ss to read the paragraph and do the task Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the paragraph. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1. He has a robot. 2. She has a teddy bear. 3. Yes, he does. 4. She has a yo-yo and a puzzle. Practise in pairs Look at the pictures in the book Listen and number Ps answer Look at 3 pictures Work In pair to ask and answer the questions
  • 156.
    5. No, hedoesn’t. 6. Let’s sing - Introduce The Linda has a little doll song, Page 33. - Play the recording and listen to The song - Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of the rhythm. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. The others clap their hands after the song - Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors. - Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm. - Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Sing the song Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 25 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 99: UNIT 15: DO YOU HAVE ANY TOYS? Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: identify toys, and ask and answer questions about toys. Pronounce the sounds in the letters /pl/, / / correctly. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
  • 157.
    III. Teaching processes: 1.Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing the song Linda has a little doll 1. Listen and repeat Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role. Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words plane and ship -Introduce the sounds /pl/ and / / -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully -Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus. -Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer. + Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Listen and write - Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction. - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 3. Let’s chant - Introduce the Chant. - Turn on the tape. - Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant. - Ps chant in group and individual. Sing the song Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat Look at 2 sentences Listen and fill in the blank Ps listen to the tape and chant
  • 158.
    -The Ps chantand do the action. - Teacher reinforce their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 25 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 100: UNIT 15: DO YOU HAVE ANY TOYS? Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: identify toys, ask and answer questions about the toys. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer questions about the toys. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing the song: Linda has a little doll. 4. Read and complete. T introduces the topic “you are going to read the paragraph to get the information in order to fill the words given to the blanks”. Ss look at the picture and find out the situation and the toys in the picture Ss read the sentences individually and check their prediction. Ss do the task Sing the song Look at the picture in the book Read and Work individually
  • 159.
    Monitor the activityand offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1. toys; 2. orange; 3. two; 4. ship; 5. green 5. Write about you - Have pupils open their books to Page 35. Tell pupils that they are going to read and use the real information about themselves to write the sentences about their toys. - Pupils practice in pairs and complete the sentences. - Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction. - Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class. The rest of the class listen and give comments. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the reading text. - Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 6. Project - Introduce the situation. - Explain how to do the exercise: make a paper toy and ask, answer questions about toys -Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Work in pairs Fill the suitable words in the blanks Work in pairs Pairs work Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 26 Date of preparing: Date of teaching: Period 101: REVIEW 3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to:
  • 160.
    - Perform theirabilities in listening, speaking and writing related to the topics from units 11-15, using the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns they have learnt. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking, listening and writing skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Revisions. - Vocabulary: Revisions. II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: -Ask Ss to write the new words and do exercises in workbook 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: - Review the model sentences from unit11 to unit 15 1. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 on page 36 of the Student Book. Give the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answers: 1 – c; 2 – d; 3 – b; 4 – a. 2. Listen and number - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 36 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the Ask ps to practice in pairs Give the identification Listen and tick
  • 161.
    recording and matchthe information they hear to the pictures. They should number the boxes. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 1. 2. 3. 4. 3. Read and complete -T explains the situation and how to do the exercise -Ask students to read the dialogue in the book and fill the words given to complete the dialogue. Work in pairs to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. house 2. bedrooms 3. bathroom 4. small 5. There 5. They 4. Read and match - Whole class. Have pupils turn their books to page 37. Tell pupils that they are going to read the sentences to get the information in order to match the sentences to the sentences. - Pupils read the sentences individually and do the task. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary. - Pair works. Have pupils trade their answers for correction. - Call on some pupils to report their answers. The rest of the class listen give comments. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the sentences. - Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. Answer: 1.c 2. a 3. d 4.b 5. Look and say Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2, 3 and4 on Page 37. Work individually Listen and tick Work individually Work in pairs
  • 162.
    Elicit the charactersin the pictures and their names. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters in the pictures to the pupils. Ask them to ask and answer. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some pairs to perform their task in front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Pair works Do exercises in the workbook Date of preparing: Date of teaching: Period 102: SHORT STORY I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: - Review the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns from units 11 - 15. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking, listening, writing and reading skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Revisions. - Vocabulary: Revisions. - Phonic: Revisions II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Do the exercises. Correct exercise.
  • 163.
    3. New lesson: Warmup: - Review the model sentences from unit 11 to unit 15 1. Read the story. Put these lines in the correct bubbles. Then listen and check. - Read the sentences given and read the story about Cat and Mouse 3 - Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 on page 38 of the Student Book. Give the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Ss read and find out the suitable sentences to fill in the blanks and explain how to do the exercise. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and check their answers - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen. Check their guess. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the story - Play the recording again pupils listen to the story and check Ss’ answers Answer: 1. Who is Mimi? 2. How many brothers and sisters do you have? 3. Where are they? 4. How many rooms are there in your house? 2. Correct the answer -Ask students to read the story in the book and read the sentences given to find out the mistake and correct the false sentences. Work individually to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. No, he has two sister. 2. No, he has a brother. 3. No, he is Jack. 4. There are eight rooms. 3. Unscramble these words from the conversation Have Ps work individually. Read the story again and order the letters to make the meaningful words. Ask ps to practice in pairs Read the sentences Give the identification Work in pairs Listen and answer T’s questions Work in pairs Work in group Pair work
  • 164.
    Have pupils tradetheir answers for correction. - Call on some pupils to report their answers. The rest of the class listen give comments. . - Have the whole class read each word in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. Answer: a. sister b. brother c. house d. rooms e. hello f. mouse 4. Complete the conversation between Miu and Mimi - Pairs work. Have pupils turn their books to page 39. Tell pupils that they are going to read the dialogue between Miu and Mimi and find out the suitable words to complete the meaningful dialogue. - Pupils do the task. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary. - Have pupils trade their answers for correction. - Call on some pairs to report their answers. The rest of the class listen give comments. - Make a few questions to check pupils’ comprehension of the sentences. - Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. Answer: Miu: Name/is Mimi: name Miu: to meet you Mimi: Nice to meet you 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, review the phonics, vocabulary and sentence patterns from units 11 - 15. Read and do exercise in pairs. Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 26 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 105: UNIT 16: DO YOU HAVE ANY PETS. Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives:
  • 165.
    1. Knowledge: Bythe end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about pets. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Do you have any pets?–Yes, I do. I have… /No, I don’t. I have…. - Vocabulary: dog, pet, cute, cat, parrot, rabbit, goldfish II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils answer T’s questions. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting 1.Look, listen and repeat. Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 6 and what they are saying. Set the scene “you are going to listen to Nam, Quan and Mai ask and answer questions about pets. Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. Call on one pair. One repeats Nam’s part, the others repeat Mai’s, Quan’s part. Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Point and say - Have pupils look at pictures on Page 40. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary: Dog pet Cute cat Parrot rabbit goldfish Check vocab: slap the board Pair works Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat
  • 166.
    Model sentence: Doyou have any pets? –Yes, I do. I have… /No, I don’t. I have…. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters the boy and the girl to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some pairs to perform their task at the fron of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 Let’s Talk Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pairs to ask and answer questions about toys. Call some pairs to act out Correct their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Look and find out the model sentences Point the pictures and practise Pactise in pairs Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 27 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 106: UNIT 16: DO YOU HAVE ANY PETS? Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer about pets. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners - Vocabulary: in the cage, in the fish tank
  • 167.
    II. Teaching aids: 1.Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer about pets. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up Jumped words 4. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page 41 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5. Look and write - Have pupils open their books to Page 41. Get Ss to identify the characters in the picture and who they are in the picture. Teach vocabulary: In the cage in the fish tank Pet shop bird Check vocab: what and where - Tell Ss that they are going look the picture and read the paragraph to get information, find out the suitable words to write in the blanks. - Ss read silently and complete the dialogues. - Ss trade their answers for correction - Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The Work individually Indentify the characters in each picture Listen and tick Indentify the characters in each picture Work individually
  • 168.
    others listen andgive comments. Answers: 1. Dog 2. cats 3. Birds 5. Goldfish - Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text. Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 6. Let’s write - Have pupils open their books to Page 41. Get Ss to write the answers about the pets they have - Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction. - Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class. The rest of the class listen and give comments and reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Retell the content of the lesson. 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures. Write the answer individually Do exercises in the workbook WEEK: 27 Date of preparing: 24/ 8/ 2012 Date of teaching: Monday, August 27th 2012. Period 107: UNIT 16: DO YOU HAVE ANY PETS? Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able ask and answer questions about the location of pets 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Where are the cats? – They are under the table. - Vocabulary: over there, with, in the garden, flower pot, fish tank II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization:
  • 169.
    - Greeting - Checkingfor the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Ask Ss write the new words 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting about the pets 1. Look, Listen and repeat. Have Ss to look at the book at page 42. Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are saying. Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times. Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Nam’s part and the other repeat his mother’s part. Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation. - Teach vocabulary: over there with in the garden flower pot fish tank Check vocab: rub out and remember - Elicits the structures Where are the cats? – They are under the table. 2. Point and say Have Ss look at the pictures on page 42 Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles. T models/ allocates the parts of characters the boy and the girl to Ss Ask them to act out the dialogue. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures. Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, Pairs work Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat Read in pairs Look at 4 pictures Point to the pictures and practise Play role and speak out.
  • 170.
    intonation) when necessary. Callon some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments. Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task. Talk about the location of pets. Have Ps work in pair. - Display in class, others comment Listen and correct. Have Ps practise 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Work in pair practice talking: Do the exercise in the wwwwworkbook Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 27 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 108: UNIT 16: DO YOU HAVE ANY TOYS? Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer question about the location of pets. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: picture, years old II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes:
  • 171.
    1. Class organization: -Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Talk about the location of pets. 4. Listen and number - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 43 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and number the pictures they hear. They should guess the answer. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5.Read and complete Ask Ss to open the book on page 9. Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph to get the information in order to fill the missing words about the pets and the location of the pets. Have a revision of the language Ask Ss to read the paragraph and do the task (match the sentence with a appropriate picture.) Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1. Pets 2. Cat/on 3. Dog/ under 4. parrots/ rabbit/ garden Practise in pairs Look at the pictures in the book Listen and number Ps answer Look at 3 pictures Work Individually Read the paragraph
  • 172.
    6. Let’s sing -Introduce Do you have any pets song, Page 43. - Play the recording and listen to the song - Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of the rhythm. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. The others clap their hands after the song - Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors. - Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm. - Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Sing the song Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 28 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 109: UNIT 16: DO YOU HAVE ANY PETS? Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about pets and the location of pets. Pronounce the sounds in the letters / /, / / correctly . 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization:
  • 173.
    - Greeting - Checkingfor the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils talk about the location of pets they have. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing the song: Do you have any pets? 1. Listen and repeat Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role. Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words dog and parrot -Introduce the sounds / / and / / -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully -Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus. -Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer. + Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Listen and write - Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction. - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 3. Let’s chant - Introduce the Chant. - Turn on the tape. - Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant. - Ps chant in group and individual. -The Ps chant and do the action. - Teacher reinforce their pronunciation Sing the song Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat Look at 2 sentences Listen and fill in the blank Ps listen to the tape and chant
  • 174.
    4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework -Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Do exercises in the workbook Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 110: UNIT 16: DO YOU HAVE ANY PETS? Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about pets and the location of pets. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils identify family members, talk about the ages of family members. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Read the chant 4. Read and match. T introduces the topic “you are going to read the questions to get the information in order to match the answers”. Ss read the sentences individually and check their prediction. Ss do the task (match the sentence with a Read the chant Look at the sentences in the book Read and Work individually
  • 175.
    appropriate picture.) Monitor theactivity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1 – c; 2 – d; 3 – a; 4 – b. 5. Read and write -T explains the situation and how to do the exercise -Ask students to look the picture of Mai’s pets. Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on page 45. Read the paragraph and questions in the book and write the answers. Work individually to do the exercise then practice in pairs in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. She is 8 years old 2. Yes, she does. 3.She has a dog, Two goldfish and two parrots. 4.It’s at the door. 5.They are in the fish tank 6. Project - Introduce the situation. - Explain how to do the exercise: draw their pets. Tell the classmates about it -Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Work in pairs Answer the questions Work individually Vb89Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 28 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014.
  • 176.
    Period 111: UNIT17: WHAT TOYS DO YOU LIKE? Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about toys 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: What toys do you like? - I like ships - Vocabulary: ship, truck, kite, plane, train II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils greet and introduce their names and their health. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Read the chant 1. Look, listen and repeat. Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 46 and what they are saying. Set the scene “you are going to listen to Nam and Mai ask and answer questions about toys. Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. Call on one pair. One repeats Nam’s part, the other repeats Mai’s part. Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Point and say - Have pupils look at pictures on Page 12. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary: Ship truck Kite plane train Read the chant Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat
  • 177.
    check vocab: slapthe board Model sentence: What toys do you like - I like ships. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters Mai and Nam to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 Let’s Talk Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pairs to ask and answer questions about toys. Call some pairs to act out Correct their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Look and find out the model sentences Point the pictures and practise Pactise in pairs Do exercises in the workbook Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 112: UNIT 17: WHAT TOYS DO YOU LIKE? Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about toys. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing, reading and listening skills 3. Language focus:
  • 178.
    - Sentence Partners -Vocabulary: way, clean, early, in the morning II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up Talk about toys 4. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page 47 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5. Read and write - Have pupils open their books to Page 47. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what they are saying. - Tell Ss that they are going to look the pictures, read and get information to write the missing words in the sentences. - Ss read silently and complete the sentences. - Ss trade their answers for correction - Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. Answers: 1. playroom 2. planes Ss practise Indentify the characters in each picture Listen and tick Indentify the characters in each picture Work individually
  • 179.
    3. dolls 4.ships 5. kites 6. trucks - Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text. Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 6. Let’s write - Have pupils open their books to Page 47. Get Ss to write the answers about the toys they have - Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction. - Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class. The rest of the class listen and give comments and reinforce their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Retell the content of the lesson. 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures. Listen and sing Do exercises in the workbook WEEK: 29 Date of preparing: 24/ 8/ 2012 Date of teaching: Monday, August 27th 2012. Period 113: UNIT 17: WHAT TOYS DO YOU HAVE? Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about quantity. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: How many parrots do you have?- I have five parrots - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
  • 180.
    III. Teaching processes: 1.Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Ask Ss to talk about their toys they have 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting about toys 1.Look, Listen and repeat Have Ss to look at the book at page 48. Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are saying. Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrase Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times. Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Mai’s part and the other repeat Quan’s part. Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation. - Elicits the structures How many parrots do you have?- I have 5 parrots. 2. Point and say Have Ss look at the pictures on page 48 Elicit the characters in the pictures and guess what are they talking about. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles. T models/ allocates the parts of characters the boys and the girl to Ss Ask them to act out the dialogue. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures. Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of Pairs work Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat Read in pairs Look at 4 pictures Point to the pictures and practise
  • 181.
    the class. Theothers observe and give comments. Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task. Have Ps work in pair to talk about quantity - Display in class, others comment Listen and correct. Have Ps practise 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Play role and speak out. Work in pair practice talking: Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 29 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period: 114: UNIT 17: WHAT TOYS DO YOU HAVE? Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about quantity. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: different II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students’ attendance.
  • 182.
    2. Oral test: -Have pupils talk about the toys they have. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: guessing games 4. Listen and number - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 49 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and match the information they hear to the pictures. They should number the boxes. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5.Read and complete Ask Ss to identify the characters in the pictures on page 49. Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph about children’s toys to get the information in order to fill the suitable words in the blanks.” Teach vocabulary: Different Have a revision of the language Ask Ss to read the paragraph about children’s toys and fill the suitable words in the blanks. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1. Dogs/ parrots; 2. Cats/ dog; 3. goldfish 6. Let’s write Group works Look at the pictures in the book Listen and number Ps answer Look at 4 pictures Work Individually Read the paragraph and do the exercise
  • 183.
    - Have pupilsopen their books to Page 49. Get Ss to write the answers about the toys and the quantity of toys they have - Pair works. Pupils give their answers for correction. - Ask some pupils to read their answers aloud to the class. The rest of the class listen and give comments and reinforce their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Practise in pairs Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 29 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period: 115: UNIT 17: WHAT TOYS DO YOU LIKE? Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about toys and quantity. Pronounce the sounds in the letters Kite/ai/,/e/ ship /i/ correctly. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: behind II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students’ attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils talk about toys. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chain game Group work
  • 184.
    1. Listen andrepeat Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role. Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words kite and ship -Introduce the sounds i/ai/ e / /and ship / i / -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully -Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus. -Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer. + Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Listen and write - Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction. - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 3. Let’s chant - Introduce the Chant. - Turn on the tape. - Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant. - Ps chant in group and individual. -The Ps chant and do the action. - Teacher reinforce their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Listen and repeat Look at 2 sentences Listen and fill in the blank Ps listen to the tape and chant Do exercises in the workbook
  • 185.
    WEEK 29 Date ofpreparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 116: UNIT 17: WHAT TOYS DO YOU LIKE? Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about toys and quantity. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils talk about their house facilities. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Read the chant. 4. Read and match. T introduces the topic “you are going to read the paragraph to get the information in order to match the suitable questions to the answers Read the questions and answers individually then matching. Ss do the task Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus Read the chant Read the paragraph in the book Read and Work individually Work in pairs
  • 186.
    to reinforce theirpronunciation Answers: 1. c; 2. a; 3. d; 4. b. 5. Read and complete -T explains the situation and how to do the exercise -Ask students to read the paragraph in the book of page 51 and answer the questions. Work individually to find out the suitable words to fill in the blanks then give the answer in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. trucks. 2. ten. 3. has. 4. cats. 5. How 6. Project - Introduce the situation. - Explain how to do the exercise: Draw and colour the toys and the pets they have. -Ss introduce their toys and their pets in front of the class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Read the paragraph and answer the questions ind individually Work individually Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 30 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 117: UNIT 13: WHAT ARE YOU DOING? Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about one’s action in progress. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: What are you doing?- I am reading. - Vocabulary: doing, reading, cooking, listening to music, cleaning the floor II. Teaching aids:
  • 187.
    1. Teacher’s: student’sand teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils talk about toys they have. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Read the chant 1. Look, listen and repeat. Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 52 and what they are saying. Set the scene “you are going to listen to Nam and Hoa ask and answer questions about one’s action in progress. Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. Call on one pair. One repeats Nam’s part, the other repeats Hoa’s part. Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Point and say - Have pupils look at pictures on Page 52. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary: Doing reading Cooking listening to music cleaning the floor Check vocab: what and where Model sentence: What are you doing? - I am reading. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call pairs to practice in front of the whole class. Practice in pairs. Allocate the parts of the characters the boy and the girl to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. Read the chant Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat Look and find out the model sentences Point the pictures and practise
  • 188.
    - Call onsome groups to perform their task at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 Let’s Talk Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pair to ask and answer questions about one’s action in progress. Call some pairs to act out Correct their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Pactise in pairs Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 30 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 118: UNIT 18: WHAT ARE YOU DOING? Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about one’s action in progress. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils to write the new words.
  • 189.
    3. New lesson: Teacher’sactions Students’ actions Warm up Ask and answer about one’s action in progress 4. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2 and 3 on page 53 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5. Read and write - Have pupils open their books to Page 53. Explain the situation and how to do exercise. Ss are going to read the paragraph about Mai’s family’s action in progress - Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information to write the answers for questions What are they doing? - Ss read silently and complete the sentences. - Ss trade their answers within pairs for correction - Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. Answers: 1. reading 2. Is listening to music 3. are cooking - Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text. Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 6. Let’s write - Explain how to do the exercise T introduces the topic “you are going to write the answers for the questions about your action in progress” Ss read the sentences individually and do the exercise. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Pairs work Indentify the characters in each picture Listen and tick Indentify the characters in each picture Work individually Work in pairs Listen and sing
  • 190.
    Call on someSs to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. 4.Consolidation Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Retell the content of the lesson. 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures. Do exercises in the Workbook WEEK: 30 Date of preparing: 24/ 8/ 2012 Date of teaching: Monday, August 27th 2012. Period 119: UNIT 18: WHAT ARE YOU DOING? Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer question about someone’s action in progress. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: What’s he doing? – He’s doing his homework. - Vocabulary: singing, drawing, playing the piano, watching TV, doing one’s homework II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Ask Ss to ask and answer questions about one’s action in progress. 3. New lesson:
  • 191.
    Teacher’s actions Students’actions Warm up: talk about Ss’ (in class) action in progress 1. Look, Listen and repeat. Have Ss to look at the book at page 54. Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are saying. Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times. Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Linda’s part and the other repeat his father’s part. Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation. - Teach vocabulary: Singing drawing playing the piano watching TV doing one’s homework Check vocab: Rub out and remember - Elicits the structures What’s he doing? – He’s doing his homework. 2. Point and say Have Ss look at the pictures on page 54 Elicit the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles. T models/ allocates the parts of characters the boy and the girl to Ss use structure: What’s he doing? – He’s doing his homework. Ask them to act out the model dialogue. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue point and use the information in picture a, b, c and d in pairs. Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments. Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus Individually work Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat Read in pairs Look at 4 pictures Point to the pictures and practise Practice in pairs Play role and speak out.
  • 192.
    to reinforce theirpronunciation. 3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task. Have Ps work in pair to ask and answer questions about someone’s action in progress. - Display in class, others comment Listen and correct. Have Ps practise 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Work in pair practice talking: Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 30 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 120: UNIT 18: WHAT ARE YOU DOING? Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about someone’s action in progress. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: skating II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions
  • 193.
    Warm up: askand answer questions about the someone’s action in progress. 4. Listen and number - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 55 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and match the information they hear to the pictures. They should number the boxes. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5. Read and match Explain how to do exercise on page 55. Set the scene: “you are going to read and questions and match the suitable answer.” Have a revision of the language: Ask Ss to read the dialogues and answer. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some pairs to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1. b 2.d 3.a 4.c 6. Let’s sing - Introduce the I love my parents song, Page 55. - Play the recording and listen the song - Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of the rhythm. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. The others clap their hands after the song - Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors. - Call on one group to perform the song at the front of Practise in pairs Look at the pictures in the book Listen and number Ps answer Look at the picture Work in pairs Read the questions and answers in pairs Sing the song
  • 194.
    the class. Therest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm. - Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 31 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 121: UNIT 18: WHAT ARE YOU DOING? Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about one’s and someone’s action in progress. Pronounce the sounds in the letters ea/ i: /, aw / / correctly . 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer questions about someone’s action in progress. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: sing I love my parents song 1. Listen and repeat Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role. Sing the song Look at the pictures in the
  • 195.
    Focus Ps’ attentionon the letters colored differently in the words reading and drawing -Introduce the sounds ea/ i: / and aw / / -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully -Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus. -Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer. + Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Listen and write - Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction. - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 3. Let’s chant - Introduce the Chant. - Turn on the tape. - Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant. - Ps chant in group and individual. -The Ps chant and do the action. - Teacher reinforce their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words book Listen and repeat Read 2 sentences Listen and fill in the blank Ps listen to the tape and chant Do exercises in the workbook
  • 196.
    Date of preparing:15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 122: UNIT 18: WHAT ARE YOU DOING? Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about one’s and someone’s action in progress. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer questions about someone’s action 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Read the chant. 4. Read and complete. T explains the situation and how to do the exercise -Ask students to read the paragraph and choose the suitable words to fill in the blanks. Work individually to do the exercise then explain how to choose the words given to fill in the blanks in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the reading text Answers: 1. is. 2. In 3. Watching 4. playing 5. listening 5. Let’s write T introduces the topic “you are going to read the paragraph about Quan’s family the questions and write Read the chant Look at the sentences in the book Read and Work individually Work individually Fill the suitable words in the blanks
  • 197.
    the answers”. Ss readthe sentences individually and do the exercise. Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Answer: 1. His family is at home. 2. He is watching TV. 3. She is playing the piano. 4. He is listening to music. 5. He is singing. 6. Project - Introduce the situation. Ask Ss observe the pictures and talk about what children are doing. - Explain how to do the exercise: tell your classmates what they are doing. - Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. - Correct Ss’ mistakes and pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Work individually Work individually Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 31 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 123: UNIT 19: THEY ARE IN THE PARK. Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about activities in the park. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: What are they doing? - They are skating.
  • 198.
    - Vocabulary: inthe park, skating, cycling, skating, flying kites, skipping II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils describe their houses. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: read the chant 1.Look, listen and repeat. Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 58 and what they are saying. Set the scene “you are going to listen to Nam, Mrs Lan and Mai ask and answer questions about things in the room. Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. Call on someone. One repeats Nam’s part, the others repeat Mai’s part, and Mrs Lan’s part Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Point and say - Have pupils look at pictures on Page 58. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary: in the park skating cycling flying kites skipping Check vocab: what and where Model sentence: What are they doing? - They are skating. Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters Mai and Linda to the pupils. Ask them to point the pictures and act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer Read the chant Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat Look and find out the model sentences Point the pictures and practise
  • 199.
    help. Correct pronunciationerrors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 Let’s Talk Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pairs to ask and answer questions about activities in the park. Call some pairs to act out Correct their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Pactise in pairs Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 31 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 124: UNIT 19: THEY’RE IN THE PARK. Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about activities in the park. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing, reading and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners - Vocabulary: sports, games, football, happy, today II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test:
  • 200.
    - Have pupilswrite the new words. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: ask and answer questions about activities in the park. 4. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures 1a, b and 2a, b on page 59 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5. Read and write - Have pupils open their books to Page 59. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what they are doing. - Teach vocabulary: Sports games Football happy Today - Check vocabulary: what and where - Tell Ss that they are going to read the paragraph and write the missing words to fill in the sentences. - Ss read silently and complete the sentences. - Ss trade their answers for correction - Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. Answers: 1. In the park 2. Playing football 3. skipping 4. Is cycling 5. flying kites - Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text. Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. Practise in pairs Indentify the characters in each picture Listen and tick Indentify the characters in each picture Work individually Answer the questions
  • 201.
    6. Let’s write -Have pupils open their books to Page 59. Get Ss to read the questions and use the real information about yourself to answer them. - Tell Ss that they are going to read and answer the questions - Ss read silently and answer questions. - Ss trade their answers within pairs for correction - Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. 4.Consolidation Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Retell the content of the lesson. 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures. Do exercises in the workbook WEEK: 32 Date of preparing: 24/ 8/ 2012 Date of teaching: Monday, August 27th 2012. Period 125: UNIT 19: THEY’RE IN THE PARK. Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about the weather in different places. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: What’s the weather like in Ho Chi Minh city? – It’s sunny. - Vocabulary: weather, like, great, sunny, rainy, cloudy, windy, snowy, stormy II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting
  • 202.
    - Checking forthe students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Ask Ss to greet to each other 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Sing the alphabet song 1.Look, Listen and repeat. Have Ss to look at the book at page 60. Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are saying. Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times. Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Linda’s part and the other repeat Mai’s part. Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation. - Teach vocabulary: Weather like Great sunny Rainy cloudy Windy snowy Stormy Check vocab: slap the board - Elicits the structures What’s the weather like in Ho Chi Minh city? – It’s sunny. 2. Point and say Have Ss look at the pictures on page 60 Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles. T models/ allocates the parts of characters the boy and the girl to Ss Ask them to act out the dialogue. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures. Sing the song Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat Read in pairs Look at 4 pictures Point to the pictures and practise
  • 203.
    Monitor the activityand offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments. Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task. Have Ps work in pair to ask and answer questions about the weather in different places. - Display in class, others comment Listen and correct. Have Ps practise 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Play role and speak out. Work in pair practice talking: Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 31 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 126: UNIT 19: THEY’RE IN THE PARK. Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about the weather in different places. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette.
  • 204.
    2. Students’: books,notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting - T asks Ss to ask and answer questions about the weather in different places. 4. Listen and number - Have pupils look at picture on page 61 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the picture and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and number the things they listen to. They should number the things. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the things. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5. Look, read and write Ask Ss to read the questions and observe the picture find out the information to answer the questions. Set the scene: “you are going to read the question and observe the pictures in order to answer the questions” Have a revision of the language. Ask Ss to read the paragraph and do the task Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus Practise in pairs Look at the pictures in the book Listen and number Ps answer Look at 3 pictures Work Individually Read the question then answer it using the cues in the pictures
  • 205.
    to reinforce theirpronunciation Answers: 1. cloudy 2. Windy 3. Rainy 4. sunny 6. Let’s sing - Introduce The weather song, Page 61. - Play the recording and listen to The song - Play the recording again for pupils to sing each line of the rhythm. - Call on a group of six to the front of the class and do the actions. The others clap their hands after the song - Group work. Pupils practise singing and doing the actions in groups. Monitor the activity and help them when necessary. Correct pronunciation Ss’ errors. - Call on one group to perform the song at the front of the class. The rest of the class sing the song and clap the rhythm. - Have class sing the song again to reinforce their pronunciation. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Sing the song Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 32 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 127: UNIT 19: THEY’RE IN THE PARK. Lesson 3: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about activities in the park and the weather in different places. Pronounce the sounds in the letters ai/ /, a-e/ / correctly. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks.
  • 206.
    III. Teaching processes: 1.Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils ask and answer questions about the weather in different places. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Read the chant 1. Listen and repeat Play the CD and have Ps repeat each line of the chant. Then change the role. Focus Ps’ attention on the letters colored differently in the words rainy and skate -Introduce the sounds ai/ / and a-e/ / -Have Ps practice the sounds carefully -Play the CD and have Ps read the chant in chorus. -Ask Ps to give which sounds in Vietnamese are similar to, and then have Ps read words after you + Ask some pairs to ask and answer. + Have Ps recite the chant and clap the syllable to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Listen and write - Have pupils look at the sentences and guess the suitable words to fill in the blank. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and fill the blanks. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Have pupils act out the dialogue in pairs or groups for correction. - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. Answer: 3. Let’s chant - Introduce the Chant. - Turn on the tape. - Ps listen to the tape and repeat the chant. - Ps chant in group and individual. Read the chant Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat Look at 2 sentences Listen and fill in the blank Ps listen to the tape and chant
  • 207.
    - Ps chantand do the action. - Teacher reinforce their pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 32 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 128: UNIT 19: THEY’RE IN THE PARK. Lesson 3: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer questions about activities in the park and the weather in different places. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils describe their rooms. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Read the chant 4. Read and match. T introduces the topic “you are going to read the questions to match the suitable answers”. Ss read the sentences individually and check their prediction. Ss do the task Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Read the chant Look at the sentences in the book Read and Work individually
  • 208.
    Have Ss tradethe answers in pairs for correction Call on some pairs to report their answers and explain how to choose the answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the sentences. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Answers: 1. c; 2. d; 3. b; 4. e; 5. a 5. Read and complete -T explains the situation and how to do the exercise -Ask students to read the paragraph in the book and fill the words given to complete the paragraph. Work individually to do the exercise then report in front of the whole class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation. Answer: 1. weather 2. park 3. flying 4. playing 5. skating 6. Project - Introduce the situation. - Explain how to do the exercise: Draw and color a weather icon for tomorrow’s weather in S’s place. -Ss act out in front of the class. The rest listen to and give the remark. Correct the pronunciation 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Work in pairs Fill the suitable words in the blanks Work individually Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 33 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 129: UNIT 20: WHERE’S SA PA? Lesson 1: Part 1-2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to: ask and answer about places.
  • 209.
    2. Skills: - DevelopSs speaking and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Where’s Sa Pa?- It’s in north Vietnam - Vocabulary: north, south, central, beautiful II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils talk about the weather. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Read the chant 1. Look, listen and repeat. Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 64 and what they are saying. Set the scene “you are going to listen to Mai and Linda ask and answer questions about places”. Play the recording and asks Ss to listen to the tape. T asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus two times. Call on one pair. One repeats Mai’s part, the other repeats Linda’s part. Have whole class repeat all the phrases a few times to reinforce their pronunciation. 2. Point and say - Have pupils look at pictures on Page 64. Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Teach vocabulary: North south Central beautiful check vocab: what and where Model sentence: Where’s Sa Pa? - It’s in north Vietnam Ask pupils to guess and complete the speech bubbles. - Model: Call on a pair. Allocate the parts of the characters Mai and Quan to the pupils. Ask them to Read the chant Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat Look and find out the model sentences
  • 210.
    point the picturesand act out the dialogues. Using the pictures in their books. Monitor the activity and offer help. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. - Call on some pairs to perform their task at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation. 3. Let’s Talk Ask students to look at the pictures in the book. Ask them to identify the characters in the pictures. Ask Ss work in pairs ask and answer questions about places. Call some pairs to act out Correct their pronunciation and mistake. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Point the pictures and practise Practise in pairs Do exercises in the workbook Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 130: UNIT 20: WHERE’S SA PA? Lesson 1: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson Ps will be able to ask and answer questions about places. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss writing, reading and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting
  • 211.
    - Checking forthe students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Have pupils write the new words. 3. New lesson: Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up – Ask and answer questions about places. 4. Listen and number - Have pupils look at pictures 1, 2, and 3 on page 65 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and number the pictures they hear. Guess the answer - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and tick the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5. Read and write - Have pupils open their books to Page 65. Get Ss to identify the characters in the pictures and what they are. Teach vocabulary: city Ha long bay place town village bridge market - Tell Ss that they are going to read and get information to write the missing words in sentences. - Ss read silently and complete the sentences. - Ss trade their answers for correction - Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. Answers: 1. Thang Long bridge/north Vietnam 2. Ben Thanh market/south Vietnam - Make some questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the reading text. Have the whole class read each line of the dialogues chorally to reinforce their pronunciation. 6. Let’s write Pairs work Indentify the characters in each picture Listen and number Indentify the characters in each picture Work individually Listen and sing
  • 212.
    - Have pupilsopen their books to Page 65. Get Ss to read the questions and use the real information about their places to answer. - Tell Ss that they are going to read and answer the questions about their places. - Ss read silently and answer questions. - Ss trade their answers within pairs for correction Ask Ss to read the answers aloud to the class. The others listen and give comments. 4.Consolidation Asking Ps to focus on the structure once again. - Retell the content of the lesson. 5. Homework Do exercises in the workbook. Learn by heart the new words and structures. Do exercises in the workbook WEEK: 33 Date of preparing: 24/ 8/ 2012 Date of teaching: Monday, August 27th 2012. Period 131: UNIT 20: WHERE’S SA PA? Lesson 2: Part 1- 2-3 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about distance. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss speaking and listening skills. 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: Is Hai Duong near Ha noi? –Yes, it is/No, It isn’t. - Vocabulary: near, far from, far, distance II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette, puppets. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance. 2. Oral test: - Ask Ss to talk about toys
  • 213.
    3. New lesson: Teacher’sactions Students’ actions Warm up: Jumped letters 6. Look, Listen and repeat. Have Ss to look at the book at page 66. Elicit the character and have Ss guess what they are saying. Set the scene: we are going to learn new phrases Have Ss listen to the recording as they read the lines in the speech bubbles Play the recording again for Ss to repeat the lines in the speech bubbles two times. Divide the class into two groups. One repeat Tony’s part and the other repeat Linda’s part. Play the recording again for the whole class to repeat each line in the speech bubbles to reinforce their pronunciation. - Teach vocabulary: Near far from Far distance Check vocab: slap the board - Elicits the structures Is Hai Duong near Ha noi? –Yes, it is/No, It isn’t. 2. Point and say Have Ss look at the pictures on page 66 Elicit the characters in the pictures and their names. Ask Ss to guess and complete the speech bubbles. T models/ allocates the parts of characters of the children to Ss Ask them to act out the dialogue. Repeat the step with some other pairs for pictures Have Ss practice acting out the dialogue in pairs, using the pictures. Monitor the activity and offer held. Correct pronunciation errors (stress, assimilation of sounds, intonation) when necessary. Call on some pairs to perform the task at the front of the class. The others observe and give comments. Have the whole class repeat all the phrases in chorus Look at the pictures in the book Listen and repeat Read in pairs Look at 4 pictures Point to the pictures and practise Play role and speak out.
  • 214.
    to reinforce theirpronunciation. 3 - Let’s talk: Show picture and give task. Have Ps work in pair ask and answer question about distance. - Display in class, others comment Listen and correct. Have Ps practise 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Work in pairs practice talking: Do exercises in the workbook WEEK 33 Date of preparing: 15/ 8/ 2014 Date of teaching: Wednesday, August 18th 2014. Period 132: UNIT 20: WHERE’S SA PA? Lesson 2: Part 4-5-6 I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: - By the end of this lesson, Students will be able to ask and answer questions about distance. 2. Skills: - Develop Ss reading, writing and listening skills 3. Language focus: - Sentence Partners: - Vocabulary: II. Teaching aids: 1. Teacher’s: student’s and teacher’s book, pictures, cassette. 2. Students’: books, notebooks, workbooks. III. Teaching processes: 1. Class organization: - Greeting - Checking for the students' attendance.
  • 215.
    2. Oral test: -Have pupils write the new words. 3. New lesson Teacher’s actions Students’ actions Warm up: Chatting: talk about the distance. 4. Listen and tick - Have pupils look at pictures a, b, c and d on page 67 of the Student Book. Elicit the identification of the characters in the pictures and the characters’ words. Tell pupils that they are going to listen to the recording and tick True or False. Ss guess to tick the p pictures True or False the boxes. - Play the recording 2 times pupils to listen and number the boxes. Check their guess. Compare the answer with the partner. - Play the recording again pupils check their answers. T give the answer: - Ask some questions to ensure pupils’ comprehension of the listening text. 5. Read and complete Ask Ss to identify the characters in the picture on page 67. Set the scene: “you are going to read the paragraph to get the information about Nam’s places in order to fill the suitable words in the blanks” Teach vocab: Theater now Temple lake Museum water puppet theater - Check vocab: Slap the board Have a revision of the language Ask Ss to read the paragraph and do the task Monitor the activity and offer help when necessary Have Ss trade the answers in pairs for correction Call on some Ss to report their answers. Others listen and comment. Make a few questions to check Ss’ comprehension of the paragraph. Have the whole class read each sentence in chorus to reinforce their pronunciation Practise in pairs Look at the pictures in the book Listen and number Ps answer Look at 3 pictures Work In pair to ask and answer the questions
  • 216.
    Answers: 1. Name2. Near 3. Theater 4. far 6. Let’s play - Explain how the game is played: pupils play in pairs. - When the time is up, call on pairs to demonstrate the game at the front of the class. The rest of the class observe and give comments. - Have the whole class repeat all the sentences to reinforce their pronunciation. Follow up: - Have pupils brainstorm and spell their names of their classmates / friends. 4.Consolidation Summary the lesson 5.Homework - Do exercises in workbook, learn by heart the new words Play game Do exercises in the workbook